Specialty Retailer - James E. John Construction Co., Inc.

Transcription

vega
architecture llc
Specialty
Retailer
Denver
Project #: P13.0620.VCOCW
Project Address:
1433 Washington Street
Denver, CO 80203
Project Manual
07.30.2013 – PERMIT & CONSTRUCTION
Table of Contents Generated by Masterworks: 07/30/2013
Division
Section Title
Pages
SPECIFICATIONS GROUP
General Requirements Subgroup
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
010000
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
011000
SUMMARY
012300
ALTERNATES
012600
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
012900
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
013100
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
013200
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
013300
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
014000
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
014200
REFERENCES
015000
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
016000
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
017300
EXECUTION
017419
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
017700
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
017823
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
017839
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
1
3
1
2
3
5
4
7
7
12
6
5
8
2
5
6
3
Facility Construction Subgroup
DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS
024119
SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
5
DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE
033000
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
9
DIVISION 05 - METALS
055000
METAL FABRICATIONS
6
DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES
061053
MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY
061600
SHEATHING
066400
PLASTIC PANELING
3
4
2
DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
072100
THERMAL INSULATION
072600
UNDERSLAB VAPOR BARRIER
072726
SPARY OR ROLLER APPLIED WATER RESISTIVE MEMBRANE AND AIR BARRIER
075423
THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING
077100
ROOF SPECIALTIES
079200
JOINT SEALANTS
079500
EXPANSION CONTROL
4
2
5
9
6
5
3
DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS
081113
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
081416
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
083113
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
083613
SECTIONAL DOORS
084113
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
084229.23 SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES
085113
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
088000
GLAZING
7
4
3
3
8
5
4
6
DIVISION 09 - FINISHES
092216
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
092400
ONE COAT STUCCO
092423
THREE COAT STUCCO
092900
GYPSUM BOARD
093000
TILING
095113
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
099600
HIGH PERFORMANCE COATINGS
4
4
4
6
3
3
5
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
102113
TOILET COMPARTMENTS
107000
SUN SHADE SYSTEMS
2
3
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
010000
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 010000 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A.
Details Drawings and Specifications Conflicts; Should a conflict occur in or between the
Drawings and Specifications, the order of precedence shall be as follows:
1.
2.
3.
The Specifications
Large scale drawings
Small scale drawings
B.
Materials: When reference is made in the Specifications to trade names or to the names of
Manufacturers, such references are made solely to designate and identify quality of material or
equipment, and not to restrict competitive bidding. However, an “or equal” product is subject to
owner approval. In case the Contractor wishes to use materials or equipment of trade names
which differ from those mentioned in the Specifications, prior written approval from Owner must
be obtained. Owner will approve such materials or equipment changes only after written
request if they are considered suitable and equal to those specified. Whenever “approved”,
“satisfactory”, “as directed”, or other similar phrases are used in these Specifications, they shall
be understood to mean that material or construction methods referred to shall be approved by,
satisfactory to, or as directed by Owner.
C.
Manufacturer’s Directions: All manufactured articles, materials and equipment shall be applied,
installed, connected, erected, used, cleaned, and conditioned as directed by Manufacturers
unless herein specified to the contrary.
D.
Workmanship: Owner will be the sole determinant of workmanship and acceptability of the final
product.
E.
Work and Material not covered in Specifications: Any item of work necessary to the proper
completion of construction under this Contract which is not specifically covered in the Drawings
and Specifications shall be performed in a manner deemed as good practice of the trade
involved. Materials and equipment not specifically covered by the Drawings and Specifications
shall be of a standard equal to good practice commensurate with the quality of dwelling being
constructed.
F.
Daily housekeeping: Owner expects the General Contractor to maintain a clean jobsite with a
minimum of a once a day clean up.
G.
Daily work reports: The General Contractor must forward preferably by email all daily work
reports within 48 hours.
H.
Project work schedules: Periodic progress work schedules must be updated and forward on to
Owner
PART 2 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 010000
Specialty Retailer –Denver CO (13.0620 VCOCW)
010000-1
011000
SUMMARY
SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
1.2
Work covered by the Contract Documents.
Use of premises.
Owner's occupancy requirements.
Specification formats and conventions.
See Division 01 Section "Multiple Contract Summary" for division of responsibilities for the
Work.
WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A.
Project Identification: Specialty Retailer
B.
Project Location: 1433 Washington Street Denver CO 80203
C.
Owner’s Address: 12612 W Alameda Parkway, Lakewood CO 80228
D.
Owner's Contact: Kevin Stees, t] (303) 986-4600 X161
E.
Architect: Vega Architecture, LLC . Contact: Rob Forslund, Project Manager, 1335 Elati
St., Unit A, Denver, CO 80204 t] (303) 872-0487, [email protected].
1.3
WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A.
The Work consists of the following: A tenant finish for a specialty retailer store, approximately
20,390 square feet in one story. The building is going to be fully sprinklered and is classified as
Type V B under the 2009 International Building Code. The existing structure is supported by
steel post and concrete bearing walls with the primarily roof structure being wood joist/beams
with intermediate steel beams supporting the new canopy over window openings. Exterior
modifications consist of replacement of existing doors, adding a new main automatic entry door,
adding new storefront openings by replacing existing storefront openings, painting, cleaning,
new exterior siding, and a new roof membrane.
B.
Project will be constructed under a single prime contract.
1.4
USE OF PREMISES
A.
General: Contractor shall have limited use of premises for construction operations as indicated
on Drawings by the Contract limits.
B.
Use of Site: Limit use of premises to work in areas indicated. Do not disturb portions of Project
site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated.
011000-1
011000
SUMMARY
1.
Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways loading areas, and entrances serving
premises clear and available to Adjacent Owner, Adjacent Owner's employees, and
emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of
materials.
a.
b.
1.5
Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances.
Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of
materials and equipment on-site.
OWNER'S OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Owner Occupancy of Completed Areas of Construction: Owner reserves the right to occupy
and to place and install equipment in completed areas of building, before Substantial
Completion, provided such occupancy does not interfere with completion of the Work. Such
placement of equipment and partial occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work.
1.
2.
3.
1.6
Obtain a Certificate of Occupancy from authorities having jurisdiction before Owner
occupancy.
Before partial Owner occupancy, mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully
operational, and required tests and inspections shall be successfully completed. On
occupancy, Owner will operate and maintain mechanical and electrical systems serving
occupied portions of building.
On occupancy, Owner will assume responsibility for maintenance and custodial service
for occupied portions of building.
WORK RESTRICTIONS
A.
1.7
Nonsmoking Building: Smoking is not permitted within the building or within 25 feet of
entrances, operable windows, or outdoor air intakes.
SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS
A.
Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the
50-division format and CSI/CSC's "MasterFormat" numbering system.
1.
B.
Division 01: Sections in Division 01 govern the execution of the Work of all Sections in
the Specifications.
Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and
the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations.
These conventions are as follows:
1.
2.
Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract
Documents is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate.
Words implied, but not stated, shall be inferred as the sense requires. Singular words
shall be interpreted as plural, and plural words shall be interpreted as singular where
applicable as the context of the Contract Documents indicates.
Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications.
Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by Contractor.
Occasionally, the indicative or subjunctive mood may be used in the Section Text for
clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by Contractor or by
others when so noted.
011000-2
011000
SUMMARY
a.
The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are
implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
011000-3
012300
ALTERNATES
SECTION 012300 - ALTERNATES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined
in the Bidding Requirements that may be added to or deducted from the Base Bid amount if
Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be
completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described
in the Contract Documents.
1.
1.3
The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract
Sum to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the
Contract Sum.
PROCEDURES
A.
Coordination: Modify or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate
work of the alternate into Project.
1.
Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar
items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part
of alternate.
B.
Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing,
of the status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred
for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated modifications to alternates.
C.
Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract.
012300-1
012600
SECTION 012600 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing
Contract modifications.
1.2
A.
PROPOSAL REQUESTS
Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed
changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If
necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications.
1.
2.
Proposal Requests issued by Architect are for information only. Do not consider them
instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change.
Within 10 days after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost
adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the
change.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
B.
MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK
Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing Minor Changes in the Work, not
involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on AIA Document G710,
"Architect's Supplemental Instructions."
1.3
A.
SUMMARY
Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with
total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey
data to substantiate quantities.
Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of
trade discounts.
Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.
Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of
the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and
finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an
extension of the Contract Time.
Quotation Form: Use forms acceptable to Owner
Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or unforeseen conditions require modifications to the
Contract, Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for a change to Architect.
1.
2.
3.
Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the
Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the
proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time.
Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total
amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to
substantiate quantities.
Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade
discounts.
012600-1
012600
4.
5.
6.
7.
Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.
Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the
change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times,
and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the
Contract Time.
Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Product Requirements" if the proposed
change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified.
Proposal Request Form: Use forms acceptable to the Owner
1.4
A.
On Owner's approval of a Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures
of Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G701.
1.5
A.
CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE
Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on
AIA Document G714. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a
change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.
1.
B.
CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It
also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the
Contract Time.
Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the
Construction Change Directive.
1.
After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary
to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.
012600-2
012900
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
SECTION 012900 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process
Applications for Payment.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
2.
1.2
Division 01 Section "Contract Modification Procedures" for administrative procedures for
handling changes to the Contract.
Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for administrative
requirements governing the preparation and submittal of the Contractor's construction
schedule.
SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A.
Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the schedule of values with preparation of Contractor's
construction schedule.
1.
Coordinate line items in the schedule of values with other required administrative forms
and schedules, including the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
B.
Application for Payment forms with continuation sheets.
Submittal schedule.
Items required to be indicated as separate activities in Contractor's construction
schedule.
Submit the schedule of values to Owner at earliest possible date but no later than seven
days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment.
Format and Content: Use Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for
the schedule of values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section.
1.
Identification: Include the following Project identification on the schedule of values:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
3.
4.
Project name and location.
Name of Architect.
Architect's project number.
Contractor's name and address.
Date of submittal.
Arrange schedule of values consistent with format of AIA Document G703.
Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued
evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports.
Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each part of the Work where
Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated
and stored, but not yet installed.
012900-1
012900
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
5.
Each item in the schedule of values and Applications for Payment shall be complete.
Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item.
a.
6.
1.3
Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual
work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the schedule of
values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option.
Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the schedule of values before the next
Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result
in a change in the Contract Sum.
APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
A.
Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as
certified by Owner and paid for by Owner.
1.
Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion,
and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.
B.
Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement
between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction work covered by each Application
for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement.
C.
Payment Application Times: Submit Application for Payment to Owner by the 1st of the month.
The period covered by each Application for Payment is one month, ending on the last day of the
month.
D.
Application for Payment Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 as form for
Applications for Payment.
E.
Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Execute by a person authorized to sign
legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Owner will return incomplete applications without
action.
1.
2.
F.
Transmittal: Submit two signed original copies of each Application for Payment to Owner by a
method ensuring receipt. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if
required.
1.
G.
Entries shall match data on the schedule of values and Contractor's construction
schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made.
Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before
last day of construction period covered by application.
Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate
information about application.
Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's
lien from entities lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien arising out of the Contract and related
to the Work covered by the payment.
1.
2.
Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after
deduction for retainage, on each item.
When an application shows completion of an item, submit conditional final or full waivers.
012900-2
012900
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
3.
4.
H.
Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or
coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
I.
List of subcontractors.
Schedule of values.
Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final).
Schedule of unit prices.
Submittal schedule (preliminary if not final).
List of Contractor's staff assignments.
List of Contractor's principal consultants.
Copies of building permits.
Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance
of the Work.
Initial progress report.
Report of preconstruction conference.
Certificates of insurance and insurance policies.
Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: Submit an Application for Payment showing
100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete.
1.
2.
J.
Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit
waivers.
Waiver Forms: Submit executed waivers of lien on forms acceptable to Owner.
Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a
statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.
This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued
previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.
Final Payment Application: After completing Project closeout requirements, submit final
Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted
and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements.
Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof
that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid.
Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum.
AIA Document G706-1994, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims."
AIA Document G706A-1994, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens."
AIA Document G707-1994, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment."
Evidence that claims have been settled.
Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of
date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed
responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work.
Final liquidated damages settlement statement.
012900-3
013100
SECTION 013100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project
including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
1.
1.2
Coordination drawings.
Requests for Information (RFIs).
Project meetings.
Division 01 Section "Execution" for procedures for coordinating general installation and
field-engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.3
RFI: Request from Owner, Owner, Architect, or Contractor seeking information required by or
clarifications of the Contract Documents.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each
portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a
special design. Include the following information in tabular form:
1.
2.
3.
1.4
Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying
products.
Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract.
Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract.
GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURES
A.
Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the
Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate
construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper
installation, connection, and operation.
1.
2.
3.
Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where
installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before
or after its own installation.
Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and
accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.
Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.
013100-1
013100
B.
Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures
required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees
at meetings.
1.
C.
Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative
procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of
the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
1.5
Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their
Work is required.
Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule.
Preparation of the schedule of values.
Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls.
Delivery and processing of submittals.
Progress meetings.
Pre-installation conferences.
Project closeout activities.
Startup and adjustment of systems.
COORDINATION DRAWINGS
A.
Coordination Drawings, General: Prepare coordination drawings according to requirements in
individual Sections, where installation is not completely shown on Shop Drawings, where limited
space availability necessitates coordination, or if coordination is required to facilitate integration
of products and materials fabricated or installed by more than one entity.
1.
Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to a scale large enough to
indicate and resolve conflicts. Do not base coordination drawings on standard printed
data. Include the following information, as applicable:
a.
b.
B.
Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural,
structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems.
Indicate dimensions shown on the Drawings. Specifically note dimensions that
appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance
requirements.
Provide alternate sketches to Architect indicating proposed
resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will
not be considered changes to the Contract.
Coordination Drawing Organization: Organize coordination drawings as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Floor Plans and Reflected Ceiling Plans: Show architectural and structural elements, and
mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical Work. Show locations of
visible ceiling-mounted devices relative to acoustical ceiling grid.
Plenum Space: Indicate sub- framing for support of ceiling and wall systems, mechanical
and electrical equipment, and related Work. Locate components within ceiling plenum to
accommodate layout of light fixtures indicated on Drawings.
Mechanical Rooms: Provide coordination drawings for mechanical rooms showing plans
and elevations of mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical
equipment.
Structural Penetrations: Indicate penetrations and openings required for all disciplines.
Slab Edge and Embedded Items: Indicate slab edge locations and sizes and locations of
embedded items for metal fabrications, sleeves, anchor bolts, bearing plates, angles,
013100-2
013100
6.
1.6
door floor closers, slab depressions for floor finishes, curbs and housekeeping pads, and
similar items.
Review: Architect will review coordination drawings to confirm that the Work is being
coordinated, but not for the details of the coordination, which are Contractor's
responsibility.
REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs)
A.
General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or interpretation of the
Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified.
1.
2.
B.
Architect will return RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities controlled by Contractor
with no response.
Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's
work or work of subcontractors.
Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or
interpretation and the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Project name.
Project number.
Date.
Name of Contractor.
Name of Architect and Owner.
RFI number, numbered sequentially.
RFI subject.
Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate.
Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate.
Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's solution(s) impacts the Contract Time
or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI.
Contractor's signature.
Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data,
Shop Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe
items needing interpretation.
C.
RFI Forms: AIA Document G716.
D.
Architect's and Owner's Action: Architect and Owner will review each RFI, determine action
required, and respond. Allow seven working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs
received by Architect or Owner after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following
working day.
1.
The following RFIs will be returned without action:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Requests for approval of submittals.
Requests for approval of substitutions.
Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract
Documents.
Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum.
Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals.
Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs.
013100-3
013100
2.
3.
Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case
Architect's time for response will date from time of receipt of additional information.
Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the
Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to
Division 01 Section "Contract Modification Procedures."
a.
E.
RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number.
Submit log every two weeks. Include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
F.
Project name.
Name and address of Contractor.
Name and address of Architect and Owner.
RFI number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted.
RFI description.
Date the RFI was submitted.
Date Architect's and Owner's response was received.
On receipt of Architect's and Owner's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the
RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect and Owner within seven
days if Contractor disagrees with response.
1.
1.7
If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or
the Contract Sum, notify Architect and Owner in writing within seven days of
receipt of the RFI response.
Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and
Proposal Request, as appropriate.
PROJECT MEETINGS
A.
General: Owner will schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site unless
otherwise indicated.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is
required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled
meeting dates and times.
Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees.
Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record significant discussions and
agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including
Owner, Owner, and Architect, within three days of the meeting.
Progress Meetings: Owner will conduct progress meetings at weekly intervals.
1.
2.
Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner ,and Owner, , each contractor,
subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in
planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these
meetings. All participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to
conclude matters relating to the Work.
Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review
other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as
appropriate to status of Project.
a.
Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting.
Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind
013100-4
013100
schedule, in relation to Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how
construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties
involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that
current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.
1)
b.
Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)
14)
15)
16)
17)
18)
3.
Review schedule for next period.
Interface requirements.
Sequence of operations.
Status of submittals.
Deliveries.
Off-site fabrication.
Access.
Site utilization.
Temporary facilities and controls.
Progress cleaning.
Quality and work standards.
Status of correction of deficient items.
Field observations.
Status of RFIs.
Status of proposal requests.
Pending changes.
Status of Change Orders.
Pending claims and disputes.
Documentation of information for payment requests.
Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting the meeting will record and distribute the
meeting minutes to each party present and to parties requiring information.
a.
Schedule Updating:
Revise Contractor's construction schedule after each
progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized.
Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.
013100-5
013200
SECTION 013200 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of
construction during performance of the Work, including the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
1.
1.2
Contractor's construction schedule.
Construction schedule updating reports.
Daily construction reports.
Site condition reports.
Division 01 Section "Multiple Contract Summary" for preparing a combined Contractor's
construction schedule.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring,
and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume
time and resources.
1.
2.
3.
Critical Activity: An activity on the critical path that must start and finish on the planned
early start and finish times.
Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network.
Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network.
B.
CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction project
where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations determine
when activities can be performed and the critical path of Project.
C.
Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network
schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float.
D.
Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity.
1.
1.3
Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either Owner or Contractor, but is a
jointly owned, expiring Project resource available to both parties as needed to meet
schedule milestones and Contract completion date.
A.
Format for Submittals: Submit required submittals in the following format:
1.
PDF electronic file.
013200-1
013200
B.
Contractor's Construction Schedule: Initial schedule, of size required to display entire schedule
for entire construction period.
C.
Construction Schedule Updating Reports: Submit with Applications for Payment.
D.
Daily Construction Reports: Submit at weekly intervals.
E.
Site Condition Reports: Submit at time of discovery of differing conditions.
1.4
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of
construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors.
B.
Coordinate Contractor's construction schedule with the schedule of values, submittal schedule,
progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports.
1.
2.
Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from entities
involved.
Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule
them in proper sequence.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A.
Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for the Notice of Award to date of final
completion.
1.
B.
Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each main
element of the Work. Comply with the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows
an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order.
Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for the following long lead
items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in
schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals,
approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery.
Submittal Review Time: Include review and re-submittal times indicated in Division 01
Section "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in
Contractor's construction schedule with submittal schedule.
Startup and Testing Time: Include no fewer than five days for startup and testing.
Substantial Completion:
Indicate completion in advance of date established for
Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's and Owner's administrative
procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion.
Punch List and Final Completion: Include not more than 5 days for completion of punch
list items and final completion.
Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and
as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected.
013200-2
013200
1.
2.
Work by Owner: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work performed by
Owner.
Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the
Work.
D.
Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but
not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and final completion.
E.
Upcoming Work Summary: Prepare summary report indicating activities scheduled to occur or
commence prior to submittal of next schedule update. Summarize the following issues:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
F.
2.2
Unresolved issues.
Unanswered Requests for Information.
Rejected or unreturned submittals.
Notations on returned submittals.
Pending modifications affecting the Work and Contract Time.
Recovery Schedule: When periodic update indicates the Work is 14 or more calendar days
behind the current approved schedule, submit a separate recovery schedule indicating means
by which Contractor intends to regain compliance with the schedule.
CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (GANTT CHART)
A.
Gantt-Chart Schedule: Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal, Gantt-chart-type,
Contractor's construction schedule within 5 days of date established for the Notice of Award.
B.
Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of
each week with a continuous vertical line.
2.3
REPORTS
A.
Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following
information concerning events at Project site:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
List of subcontractors at Project site.
List of separate contractors at Project site.
Approximate count of personnel at Project site.
Equipment at Project site.
Material deliveries.
High and low temperatures and general weather conditions, including presence of rain or
snow.
Accidents.
Meetings and significant decisions.
Unusual events.
Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses.
Meter readings and similar recordings.
Emergency procedures.
Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction.
Change Orders received and implemented.
Construction Change Directives received and implemented.
Services connected and disconnected.
Equipment or system tests and startups.
Partial completions and occupancies.
013200-3
013200
19.
B.
Substantial Completions authorized.
Site Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between site conditions and
the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a Request for
Information.
Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with
recommendations for changing the Contract Documents.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A.
Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At two week intervals, update schedule to reflect
actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule 3 days before each regularly
scheduled progress meeting.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have
been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each
such meeting.
Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not
limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations.
As the Work progresses, indicate final completion percentage for each activity.
Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect, Owner, separate contractors,
testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know
schedule responsibility.
1.
2.
Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices.
When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in
the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their
assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction
activities.
013200-4
013300
SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural
requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.
B.
1.
2.
3.
1.2
Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and
reports, including Contractor's construction schedule.
Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and
maintenance manuals.
Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record
Specifications, and record Product Data.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require
Architect's and Owner's responsive action.
B.
Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not
require Architect's and Owner's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not
complying with requirements.
1.3
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates
required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing,
fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making
corrections or revisions to submittals noted by Architect and Owner and additional time for
handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections.
SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Architect's Digital Data Files: Electronic copies of digital data files of the Contract Drawings
will be provided by the Architect for the fire sprinkler subcontractor for use on this project only.
All other request may be subject to a digital transfer fee.
B.
Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of
construction activities.
1.
2.
Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals,
and related activities that require sequential activity.
Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so
processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for
coordination.
013300-1
013300
a.
C.
Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for re-submittals, as follows.
Time for review shall commence on Owner’s receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract
Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work
to permit processing, including re-submittals.
1.
2.
3.
D.
Owner maintains the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination
with other submittals until related submittals are received.
Initial Review: Allow 7 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow 7 additional days
for coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Owner will advise Contractor
when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.
Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner
as initial submittal.
Re-submittal Review: Allow 7 days for review of each re-submittal.
Submittals: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal item for identification.
1.
2.
3.
Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block.
Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches on label or beside title block to record
Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Owner.
Include the following information for processing and recording action taken:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
Project name.
Date.
Name of Architect.
Name of Owner.
Name of Contractor.
Name of subcontractor.
Name of supplier.
Name of manufacturer.
Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.
1)
j.
k.
l.
m.
4.
Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.
Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate.
Other necessary identification.
Additional Paper Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and
unless Owner observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial
submittal may serve as final submittal.
a.
5.
Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a
decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., 061000.01).
Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point
(e.g., 061000.01.A).
Submit one copy of submittal to concurrent reviewer in addition to specified
number of copies to Owner.
Transmittal for Electronic Submittals:
Assemble each submittal individually and
appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal
form. Owner will discard submittals received from sources other than Contractor.
a.
Transmittal Form for Paper Submittals: Provide locations on form for the following
information:
013300-2
013300
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)
14)
15)
16)
17)
18)
19)
Project name.
Date.
Destination (To:).
Source (From:).
Name and address of Architect.
Name of Owner.
Name of Contractor.
Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal.
Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier.
Category and type of submittal.
Submittal purpose and description.
Specification Section number and title.
Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name
for each of multiple items.
Indication of full or partial submittal.
Transmittal number[, numbered consecutively].
Submittal and transmittal distribution record.
Remarks.
Signature of transmitter.
E.
Options: Identify options requiring selection by Architect.
F.
Deviations: Identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals.
G.
Re-submittals: Make re-submittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.
1.
2.
3.
Note date and content of previous submittal.
Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of
revision.
Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Owner's action
stamp.
H.
Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers,
fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of
construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.
I.
Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final
action submittals that are marked with approval notation from Owner's action stamp.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
General Submittal Procedure Requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Submit electronic submittals via email as PDF electronic files.
Action Submittals: Submit three paper copies of each submittal unless otherwise
indicated. Owner will return two copies.
Informational Submittals: Submit two paper copies of each submittal unless otherwise
indicated. Owner will not return copies.
Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature of
entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be
013300-3
013300
signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that
entity.
B.
Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and
type of product or equipment.
1.
2.
3.
If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data
are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.
Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable.
Include the following information, as applicable:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
4.
For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable:
a.
b.
c.
d.
5.
6.
Three paper copies of Product Data unless otherwise indicated. Owner will return
two copies.
Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base
Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data.
1.
Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents.
following information, as applicable:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.
3.
D.
Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring.
Printed performance curves.
Operational range diagrams.
Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop
Drawings.
Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples.
Submit Product Data in the following format:
a.
C.
Manufacturer's catalog cuts.
Manufacturer's product specifications.
Standard color charts.
Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards.
Testing by recognized testing agency.
Application of testing agency labels and seals.
Notation of coordination requirements.
Availability and delivery time information.
Include the
Identification of products.
Schedules.
Compliance with specified standards.
Notation of coordination requirements.
Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.
Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated.
Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.
Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop
Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches, but no larger than 30 by 42 inches.
Submit Shop Drawings in the same manner as above.
Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these
characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between
submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.
013300-4
013300
1.
2.
Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories
together in one submittal package.
Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
3.
Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for qualitycontrol comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be
used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.
a.
b.
4.
Generic description of Sample.
Product name and name of manufacturer.
Sample source.
Number and title of applicable Specification Section.
Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual
Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time
of use.
Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's
property, are the property of Contractor.
Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or
sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.
a.
Number of Samples: Submit one full set(s) of available choices where color,
pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from
manufacturer's product line. Owner will return submittal with options selected.
E.
Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section
"Construction Progress Documentation."
F.
Application for Payment and Schedule of Values:
Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures."
G.
Test and Inspection Reports and Schedule of Tests and Inspections Submittals: Comply with
requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements."
H.
Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements specified
in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures."
I.
Maintenance Data: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and
Maintenance Data."
J.
Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of
firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact
information of architect and owner, and other information specified.
K.
Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel
comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure
Specification and Procedure Qualification Record on AWS forms. Include names of firms and
personnel certified.
L.
Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is
authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.
Comply with requirements specified in
013300-5
013300
M.
Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying
that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of
manufacturing experience where required.
N.
Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
O.
Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
P.
Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's
standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with
requirements in the Contract Documents.
Q.
Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current product produced by
manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on
evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or
on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
R.
Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project.
S.
Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section
"Quality Requirements."
T.
Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing
agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation
of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents.
U.
Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing
agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed
before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate
preparation needed for adhesion.
V.
Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests
performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for
compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW
A.
Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with
other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections
and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Owner.
B.
Project Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals:
Section "Closeout Procedures."
C.
Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name
and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date
of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked,
and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.
See requirements in Division 01
013300-6
013300
3.2
OWNER'S ACTION
A.
General: Owner will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will
return them without action.
B.
Action Submittals: Owner] will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or
revisions required, and return it. Owner will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will
mark stamp appropriately to indicate action.
C.
Informational Submittals: Owner will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it
if it does not comply with requirements. Owner will forward each submittal to appropriate party.
D.
Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned
for re-submittal without review.
E.
Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be
discarded.
013300-7
014000
SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality
control.
B.
Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or
indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the
Contract Document requirements.
1.
2.
C.
1.
1.2
Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other qualityassurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document
requirements.
Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required
by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this
Section.
Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during
execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed
construction will comply with requirements.
B.
Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after
execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and
completed construction comply with requirements.
Services do not include contract
enforcement activities performed by Architect or Owner.
C.
Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are constructed
to verify selections made under Sample submittals; to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where
indicated, qualities of materials and execution; to review coordination, testing, or operation; to
show interface between dissimilar materials; and to demonstrate compliance with specified
installation tolerances. Mockups are not Samples. Unless otherwise indicated, approved
mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged.
D.
Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for Project before
products and materials are incorporated into the Work, to verify performance or compliance with
specified criteria.
E.
Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing
agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to
establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements.
014000-1
014000
F.
Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, e.g.,
plant, mill, factory, or shop.
G.
Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation
of the Work and for completed Work.
H.
Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing
laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.
I.
Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an
employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation,
including installation, erection, application, and similar operations.
1.
J.
1.3
Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that
certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or that
requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade(s).
Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" means having successfully
completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project;
being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of
authorities having jurisdiction.
CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS
A.
Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the
standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels,
comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different,
but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding.
B.
Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be
the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the
minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits.
To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as
appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision
before proceeding.
1.4
A.
1.5
Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a
recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.
REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS
A.
Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other
Sections. Include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Date of issue.
Project title and number.
Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency.
Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.
Names of individuals making tests and inspections.
014000-2
014000
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
B.
Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting tests and inspections
specified in other Sections. Include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
1.6
Description of the Work and test and inspection method.
Identification of product and Specification Section.
Complete test or inspection data.
Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results.
Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and
inspecting.
Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with
the Contract Document requirements.
Name and signature of laboratory inspector.
Recommendations on retesting and re-inspecting.
Name, address, and telephone number of representative making report.
Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product.
Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with
requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken.
Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance
complies with requirements.
Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.
Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses,
certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee
payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for
compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels
required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.
B.
Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar
to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as
well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.
C.
Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated
for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient
production capacity to produce required units.
D.
Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling
work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has
resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
E.
Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to
practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering
services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for
installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar in material, design, and extent
to those indicated for this Project.
F.
Specialists: Certain Specification Sections require that specific construction activities shall be
performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy
qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated.
014000-3
014000
1.
G.
Requirements of authorities having jurisdiction shall supersede requirements for
specialists.
Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the
experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according
to ASTM E 329; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and, where
required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities.
1.
2.
NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7.
NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory
Accreditation Program.
H.
Manufacturer's Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer
who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation of
manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for
this Project.
I.
Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing
for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the
following:
1.
Contractor responsibilities include the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
J.
Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction.
Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing
results to prevent delaying the Work.
Build laboratory mockups at testing facility using personnel, products, and methods
of construction indicated for the completed Work.
When testing is complete, remove test specimens, assemblies, mockups, and
laboratory mockups; do not reuse products on Project.
Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test, inspection,
and similar quality-assurance service to Owner, with copy to Contractor. Interpret tests
and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies
with or deviates from the Contract Documents.
Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each
form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using
materials indicated for the completed Work:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by
Architect or Owner.
Notify Architect and Owner seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will
be constructed.
Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
Obtain Architect's and Owner's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or
construction.
a.
5.
6.
Allow seven days for initial review and each re-review of each mockup.
Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for
judging the completed Work.
Demolish and remove mockups when directed unless otherwise indicated.
014000-4
014000
1.7
QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility,
Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services.
1.
2.
B.
Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing
agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged
to perform.
Costs for re-testing and re-inspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by
work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor.
Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are
Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities required to verify that the
Work complies with requirements, whether specified or not.
1.
Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing
agency to perform these quality-control services.
a.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in
writing by Owner.
Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires
testing or inspecting will be performed.
Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a
certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service.
Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract
Documents are Contractor's responsibility.
Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction,
when they so direct.
C.
Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's representative to
observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's representative's services include examination of
substrates and conditions, verification of materials, inspection of completed portions of the
Work, and submittal of written reports.
D.
Retesting/Re-inspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's
responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and re-inspecting, for
construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.
E.
Testing Agency Responsibilities:
Cooperate with Architect, Owner, and Contractor in
performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Notify Owner, and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the
Work during performance of its services.
Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests
are conducted.
Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and
inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements.
Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar qualitycontrol service through Contractor.
Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or
approve or accept any portion of the Work.
Do not perform any duties of Contractor.
014000-5
014000
F.
Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and
similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify
agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
G.
Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance
and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing
construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.
1.
1.8
Access to the Work.
Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.
Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and
inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples.
Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples.
Delivery of samples to testing agencies.
Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing
agency.
Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project
site.
Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.
SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
A.
Special Tests and Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to conduct
special tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of
Owner, and as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures
and reviews the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work.
Notifying Architect, Owner, and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies
observed in the Work during performance of its services.
Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control
service to Architect, through Owner, with copy to Contractor and to authorities having
jurisdiction.
Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which
includes a list of unresolved deficiencies.
Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected
work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.
Retesting and re-inspecting corrected work.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
TEST AND INSPECTION LOG
A.
Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following:
1.
2.
Date test or inspection was conducted.
Description of the Work tested or inspected.
014000-6
014000
3.
4.
B.
3.2
Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect.
Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection.
Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access to test
and inspection log for Architect's and Owner's reference during normal working hours.
REPAIR AND PROTECTION
A.
General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair
damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.
1.
Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other
Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched
areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible
as possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching
in Division 01 Section "Execution."
B.
Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.
C.
Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of
responsibility for quality-control services.
014000-7
014200
REFERENCES
SECTION 014200 - REFERENCES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DEFINITIONS
A.
General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.
B.
"Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications,
and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the
Conditions of the Contract.
C.
"Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested,"
"authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed."
D.
"Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings,
in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted,"
"scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated."
E.
"Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having
jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control
performance of the Work.
F.
"Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly,
installation, and similar operations.
G.
"Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking,
assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing,
protecting, cleaning, and similar operations.
H.
"Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.
I.
"Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site
is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which
Project is to be built.
1.2
INDUSTRY STANDARDS
A.
Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements,
applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied
directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part
of the Contract Documents by reference.
B.
Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless
C.
Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with
industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not
bound with the Contract Documents.
014200-1
014200
REFERENCES
1.
1.3
Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain
copies directly from publication source.
ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS
A.
Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other
Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Thomson
Gale's "Encyclopedia of Associations" or in Columbia Books' "National Trade & Professional
Associations of the U.S."
B.
Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other
Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list.
AA
Aluminum Association, Inc. (The)
AAADM
American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers
AABC
Associated Air Balance Council
AAMA
American Architectural Manufacturers Association
AASHTO
American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials
AATCC
American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists
ABAA
Air Barrier Association of America
ABMA
American Bearing Manufacturers Association
ACI
American Concrete Institute
ACPA
American Concrete Pipe Association
AEIC
Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The)
AF&PA
American Forest & Paper Association
AGA
American Gas Association
AGC
Associated General Contractors of America (The)
AHA
American Hardboard Association
(Now part of CPA)
AHAM
Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers
AI
Asphalt Institute
AIA
American Institute of Architects (The)
AISC
American Institute of Steel Construction
AISI
American Iron and Steel Institute
AITC
American Institute of Timber Construction
014200-2
014200
REFERENCES
ALCA
Associated Landscape Contractors of America
(Now PLANET - Professional Landcare Network)
ALSC
American Lumber Standard Committee, Incorporated
AMCA
Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.
ANSI
American National Standards Institute
AOSA
Association of Official Seed Analysts, Inc.
APA
Architectural Precast Association
APA
APA - The Engineered Wood Association
APA EWS
APA - The Engineered Wood Association; Engineered Wood Systems
(See APA - The Engineered Wood Association)
API
American Petroleum Institute
ARI
Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute
ARMA
Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association
ASCE
American Society of Civil Engineers
ASCE/SEI
American Society of Civil Engineers/Structural Engineering Institute
(See ASCE)
ASHRAE
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers
ASME
ASME International
(American Society of Mechanical Engineers International)
ASSE
American Society of Sanitary Engineering
ASTM
ASTM International
(American Society for Testing and Materials International)
AWCI
Association of the Wall and Ceiling Industry
AWCMA
American Window Covering Manufacturers Association
(Now WCMA)
AWI
Architectural Woodwork Institute
AWPA
American Wood Protection Association
(Formerly: American Wood Preservers' Association)
AWS
American Welding Society
AWWA
American Water Works Association
BHMA
Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association
014200-3
014200
REFERENCES
BIA
Brick Industry Association (The)
BICSI
BICSI, Inc.
BIFMA
BIFMA International
(Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's Association International)
BISSC
Baking Industry Sanitation Standards Committee
BWF
Badminton World Federation
(Formerly: IBF - International Badminton Federation)
CCC
Carpet Cushion Council
CDA
Copper Development Association
CEA
Canadian Electricity Association
CEA
Consumer Electronics Association
CFFA
Chemical Fabrics & Film Association, Inc.
CGA
Compressed Gas Association
CIMA
Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association
CISCA
Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association
CISPI
Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute
CLFMI
Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute
CRRC
Cool Roof Rating Council
CPA
Composite Panel Association
CPPA
Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe Association
CRI
Carpet and Rug Institute (The)
CRSI
Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
CSA
Canadian Standards Association
CSA
CSA International
(Formerly: IAS - International Approval Services)
CSI
Cast Stone Institute
CSI
Construction Specifications Institute (The)
CSSB
Cedar Shake & Shingle Bureau
CTI
Cooling Technology Institute
(Formerly: Cooling Tower Institute)
014200-4
014200
REFERENCES
DHI
Door and Hardware Institute
EIA
Electronic Industries Alliance
EIMA
EIFS Industry Members Association
EJCDC
Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee
EJMA
Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc.
ESD
ESD Association
(Electrostatic Discharge Association)
ETL SEMCO
Intertek ETL SEMCO
(Formerly: ITS - Intertek Testing Service NA)
FIBA
Federation Internationale de Basketball
(The International Basketball Federation)
FIVB
Federation Internationale de Volleyball
(The International Volleyball Federation)
FM Approvals
FM Approvals LLC
FM Global
FM Global
(Formerly: FMG - FM Global)
FMRC
Factory Mutual Research
(Now FM Global)
FRSA
Florida Roofing, Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors Association, Inc.
FSA
Fluid Sealing Association
FSC
Forest Stewardship Council
GA
Gypsum Association
GANA
Glass Association of North America
GRI
(Part of GSI)
GS
Green Seal
GSI
Geosynthetic Institute
HI
Hydraulic Institute
HI
Hydronics Institute
HMMA
Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association
(Part of NAAMM)
HPVA
Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association
HPW
H. P. White Laboratory, Inc.
014200-5
014200
REFERENCES
IAS
International Approval Services
(Now CSA International)
IBF
International Badminton Federation
(Now BWF)
ICEA
Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc.
ICRI
International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc.
IEC
International Electrotechnical Commission
IEEE
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The)
IESNA
Illuminating Engineering Society of North America
IEST
Institute of Environmental Sciences and Technology
IGCC
Insulating Glass Certification Council
IGMA
Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance
ILI
Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc.
ISO
International Organization for Standardization
Available from ANSI
ISSFA
International Solid Surface Fabricators Association
ITS
Intertek Testing Service NA
(Now ETL SEMCO)
ITU
International Telecommunication Union
KCMA
Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association
LMA
Laminating Materials Association
(Now part of CPA)
LPI
Lightning Protection Institute
MBMA
Metal Building Manufacturers Association
MFMA
Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association, Inc.
MFMA
Metal Framing Manufacturers Association, Inc.
MH
Material Handling
(Now MHIA)
MHIA
Material Handling Industry of America
MIA
Marble Institute of America
MPI
Master Painters Institute
014200-6
014200
REFERENCES
MSS
Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.
NAAMM
National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers
NACE
NACE International
(National Association of Corrosion Engineers International)
NADCA
National Air Duct Cleaners Association
NAGWS
National Association for Girls and Women in Sport
NAIMA
North American Insulation Manufacturers Association
NBGQA
National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc.
NCAA
National Collegiate Athletic Association (The)
NCMA
National Concrete Masonry Association
NCPI
National Clay Pipe Institute
NCTA
National Cable & Telecommunications Association
NEBB
National Environmental Balancing Bureau
NECA
National Electrical Contractors Association
NeLMA
Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association
NEMA
National Electrical Manufacturers Association
NETA
InterNational Electrical Testing Association
NFHS
National Federation of State High School Associations
NFPA
NFPA
(National Fire Protection Association)
NFRC
National Fenestration Rating Council
NGA
National Glass Association
NHLA
National Hardwood Lumber Association
NLGA
National Lumber Grades Authority
NOFMA
NOFMA: The Wood Flooring Manufacturers Association
(Formerly: National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association)
NOMMA
National Ornamental & Miscellaneous Metals Association
NRCA
National Roofing Contractors Association
NRMCA
National Ready Mixed Concrete Association
014200-7
014200
REFERENCES
NSF
NSF International
(National Sanitation Foundation International)
NSSGA
National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association
NTMA
National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association, Inc. (The)
NTRMA
National Tile Roofing Manufacturers Association
(Now TRI)
NWWDA
National Wood Window and Door Association
(Now WDMA)
OPL
Omega Point Laboratories, Inc.
(Now ITS)
PCI
Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute
PDCA
Painting & Decorating Contractors of America
PDI
Plumbing & Drainage Institute
PGI
PVC Geomembrane Institute
PLANET
Professional Landcare Network
(Formerly: ACLA - Associated Landscape Contractors of America)
PTI
Post-Tensioning Institute
RCSC
Research Council on Structural Connections
RFCI
Resilient Floor Covering Institute
RIS
Redwood Inspection Service
SAE
SAE International
SDI
Steel Deck Institute
SDI
Steel Door Institute
SEFA
Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association
SEI/ASCE
Structural Engineering Institute/American Society of Civil Engineers
(See ASCE)
SGCC
Safety Glazing Certification Council
SIA
Security Industry Association
SIGMA
Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association
(Now IGMA)
SJI
Steel Joist Institute
SMA
Screen Manufacturers Association
014200-8
014200
REFERENCES
SMACNA
Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors'
National Association
SMPTE
Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers
SPFA
Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance
(Formerly: SPI/SPFD - The Society of the Plastics Industry, Inc.; Spray
Polyurethane Foam Division)
SPIB
Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (The)
SPRI
Single Ply Roofing Industry
SSINA
Specialty Steel Industry of North America
SSPC
SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings
STI
Steel Tank Institute
SWI
Steel Window Institute
SWRI
Sealant, Waterproofing, & Restoration Institute
TCA
Tile Council of America, Inc.
(Now TCNA)
TCNA
Tile Council of North America, Inc.
TIA/EIA
Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance
TMS
The Masonry Society
TPI
Truss Plate Institute, Inc.
TPI
Turfgrass Producers International
TRI
Tile Roofing Institute
UL
Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
UNI
Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association
USAV
USA Volleyball
USGBC
U.S. Green Building Council
USITT
United States Institute for Theatre Technology, Inc.
WASTEC
Waste Equipment Technology Association
WCLIB
West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau
WCMA
Window Covering Manufacturers Association
WCSC
Window Covering Safety Council
014200-9
014200
REFERENCES
(Formerly: WCMA - Window Covering Manufacturers Association)
WDMA
Window & Door Manufacturers Association
(Formerly: NWWDA - National Wood Window and Door Association)
WI
Woodwork Institute (Formerly: WIC - Woodwork Institute of California)
WIC
Woodwork Institute of California
(Now WI)
WMMPA
Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association
WSRCA
Western States Roofing Contractors Association
WWPA
Western Wood Products Association
C.
Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other
Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list.
Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be
accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.
IAPMO
International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials
ICC
International Code Council
ICC-ES
ICC Evaluation Service, Inc.
UBC
Uniform Building Code
(See ICC)
D.
Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications
or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the
following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are
believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.
CE
Army Corps of Engineers
CPSC
Consumer Product Safety Commission
DOC
Department of Commerce
DOD
Department of Defense
DOE
Department of Energy
EPA
Environmental Protection Agency
FAA
Federal Aviation Administration
FCC
Federal Communications Commission
FDA
Food and Drug Administration
GSA
General Services Administration
HUD
Department of Housing and Urban Development
014200-10
014200
REFERENCES
LBL
Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory
NCHRP
National Cooperative Highway Research Program
(See TRB)
NIST
National Institute of Standards and Technology
OSHA
Occupational Safety & Health Administration
PBS
Public Buildings Service
(See GSA)
PHS
Office of Public Health and Science
RUS
Rural Utilities Service
(See USDA)
SD
State Department
TRB
Transportation Research Board
USDA
Department of Agriculture
USPS
Postal Service
E.
Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or
other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and
regulations in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to
change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract
Documents.
ADAAG
Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)
Architectural Barriers Act (ABA)
Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities
Available from U.S. Access Board
CFR
Code of Federal Regulations
Available from Government Printing Office
DOD
Department of Defense Military Specifications and Standards
Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point
DSCC
Defense Supply Center Columbus
(See FS)
FED-STD
Federal Standard
(See FS)
FS
Federal Specification
Available from Defense Standardization Program
Available from General Services Administration
014200-11
014200
REFERENCES
Available from National Institute of Building Sciences
FTMS
Federal Test Method Standard
(See FS)
MIL
(See MILSPEC)
MIL-STD
(See MILSPEC)
MILSPEC
Military Specification and Standards
UFAS
Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards
Available from Access Board
F.
State Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or
other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following
list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be
accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.
CBHF State of California, Department of Consumer Affairs Bureau of Home Furnishings and Thermal
Insulation
CCR
California Code of Regulations
CPUC California Public Utilities Commission
TFS
Texas Forest Service
Forest Resource Development
014200-12
015000
SECTION 015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and
protection facilities.
B.
See Division 01 Section "Execution" for progress cleaning requirements.
C.
See Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for temporary heat, ventilation, and humidity requirements
for products in those Sections.
1.2
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.3
Permanent Enclosure: As determined by Architect, permanent or temporary roofing is
complete, insulated, and weathertight; exterior walls are insulated and weathertight; and all
openings are closed with permanent construction or substantial temporary closures.
USE CHARGES
A.
General: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum.
Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not
limited to, Owner's construction forces, Architect, testing agencies, and authorities having
jurisdiction.
B.
Water Service: Water from Owner's existing water system is available for use without metering
and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as
required for construction operations.
C.
Electric Power Service: Electric power from Owner's existing system is available for use without
metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services
as required for construction operations.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for
construction personnel.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary
electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.
B.
Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each
temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.
015000-1
015000
1.6
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Installer of each permanent service shall assume
responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its
use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned
responsibilities.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Portable Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch, 9-gage, galvanized steel, chain-link fabric
fencing; minimum 6 feet high with galvanized steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch- OD line
posts and 2-7/8-inch- OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch- OD top and bottom rails.
Provide galvanized steel bases for supporting posts.
B.
Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements in Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry."
C.
Gypsum Board: Minimum 1/2 inch thick by 48 inches wide by maximum available lengths;
regular-type panels with tapered edges. Comply with ASTM C 36/C 36M.
D.
Insulation: Unfaced mineral-fiber blanket, manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool;
with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively.
2.2
TEMPORARY FACILITIES
A.
Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature
controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading.
B.
Storage and Fabrication Sheds:
Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to
accommodate materials and equipment for construction operations.
2.3
EQUIPMENT
A.
Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by
locations and classes of fire exposures.
B.
HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented,
self-contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control.
1.
2.
3.
Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating
units is prohibited.
Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a testing agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
Permanent HVAC System: If Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system for
temporary use during construction, provide filter with MERV of 8 at each return air grille in
system and remove at end of construction.
015000-2
015000
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference
with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the
Work.
1.
B.
3.2
Locate facilities to limit site disturbance as specified in Division 01 Section "Summary."
Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities
are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.
TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service.
1.
Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be
interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.
B.
Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully.
C.
Water Service: Use of Owner's existing water service facilities will be permitted, as long as
facilities are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial
Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use.
1.
Where installations below an outlet might be damaged by spillage or leakage, provide a
drip pan of suitable size to minimize water damage. Drain accumulated water promptly
from pans.
D.
Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of
construction personnel. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location,
operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities.
E.
Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities
for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from
adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a
harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed.
F.
Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction
activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction
from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on
completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to
produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption.
G.
Electric Power Service: Provide electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size,
capacity, and power characteristics required for construction operations.
1.
2.
H.
Install electric power service overhead, unless otherwise indicated.
Connect temporary service to Owner's existing power source, as directed by Owner.
Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for
construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions.
015000-3
015000
1.
I.
Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements
without operating entire system.
Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common-use facilities for use by all
construction personnel. Install one telephone line(s) for each field office.
1.
Provide additional telephone lines for the following:
a.
2.
3.
J.
3.3
Provide a dedicated telephone line for each facsimile machine and computer in
each field office.
At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers including police and fire
departments Contractor's home office Owner's office.
Provide superintendent with cellular telephone or portable two-way radio for use when
away from field office.
Electronic Communication Service: Provide temporary electronic communication service,
including electronic mail in field office.
SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A.
General: Comply with the following:
1.
2.
B.
Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
2.
C.
Provide incombustible construction for offices, shops, and sheds located within
construction area or within 30 feet of building lines. Comply with NFPA 241.
Maintain support facilities until near Substantial Completion. Remove before Substantial
Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use
permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner.
Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities.
Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants.
Project Identification and Temporary Signs: Provide Project identification and other signs.
Install signs where indicated to inform public and individuals seeking entrance to Project.
Unauthorized signs are not permitted.
1.
2.
Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors.
Maintain and touchup signs so they are legible at all times.
D.
Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle
waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
Comply with Division 01 Section "Execution" for progress cleaning requirements.
E.
Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel.
1.
F.
Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and
equipment" and not temporary facilities.
Temporary Stairs: Until permanent stairs are available, provide temporary stairs where ladders
are not adequate.
015000-4
015000
G.
3.4
Temporary Use of Permanent Stairs: Cover finished, permanent stairs with protective covering
of plywood or similar material so finishes will be undamaged at time of acceptance.
SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A.
Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct
construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations and that
minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable
effects.
B.
Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Provide measures to prevent soil erosion and
discharge of soil-bearing water runoff and airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways,
according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
C.
Stormwater Control: Comply with authorities having jurisdiction. Provide barriers in and around
excavations and subgrade construction to prevent flooding by runoff of stormwater from heavy
rains.
D.
Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line
of trees to protect vegetation from damage from construction operations. Protect tree root
systems from damage, flooding, and erosion.
E.
Pest Control: Engage pest-control service to recommend practices to minimize attraction and
harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests and to perform extermination and control
procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial
Completion. Obtain extended warranty for Owner. Perform control operations lawfully, using
environmentally safe materials.
F.
Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin, furnish and install site enclosure
fence in a manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering site except by
entrance gates.
1.
2.
Extent of Fence: As required to enclose entire Project site or portion determined
sufficient to accommodate construction operations.
Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to authorized
personnel. Provide Owner with one set of keys.
G.
Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install substantial temporary enclosure around partially
completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance,
vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security.
H.
Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting.
I.
Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in
progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and
similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior.
1.
J.
Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is not complete, insulate
temporary enclosures.
Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types
needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with
NFPA 241.
015000-5
015000
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.5
Prohibit smoking in construction areas.
Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar
sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel
at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be
followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information.
Provide temporary standpipes and hoses for fire protection. Hang hoses with a warning
sign stating that hoses are for fire-protection purposes only and are not to be removed.
Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles.
OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL
A.
Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and
abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.
B.
Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.
1.
Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control,
ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated
results and to avoid possibility of damage.
C.
Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and
protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion.
D.
Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has
ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than
Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may
have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work,
clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.
1.
2.
Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor.
Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs.
At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during
construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Division 01
Section "Closeout Procedures."
015000-6
016000
SECTION 016000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in
Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on
products; special warranties; and comparable products.
B.
1.
1.2
Division 01 Section "Substitution Procedures" for requests for substitutions.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or
taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material,"
"equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.
1.
2.
3.
B.
1.3
Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or
model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product
literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.
New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or
facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new
products.
Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal
process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service
performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or
exceed those of specified product.
Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturer's
product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make or
model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function,
dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics
for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the
specification.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Comparable Product Requests: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product.
Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification
Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.
1.
Architect's Action:
If necessary, Architect will request additional information or
documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product request.
Architect will notify Contractor through Owner of approval or rejection of proposed
comparable product request within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt
of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.
016000-1
016000
a.
b.
B.
1.4
Form of Approval: As specified in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures."
Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a
comparable product request within time allocated.
Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 01
Section "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.5
Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more
products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if
previously selected products were also options.
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage,
deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written
instructions.
B.
Delivery and Handling:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Storage:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.6
Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent
overcrowding of construction spaces.
Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that
are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other
losses.
Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original
sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for
handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.
Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and
to determine that products are undamaged and properly protected.
Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units.
Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure.
Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight
enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation.
Protect foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of
installation and concealment.
Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity,
ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage.
Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing.
PRODUCT WARRANTIES
A.
Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other
warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on
product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract
Documents.
016000-2
016000
1.
2.
B.
Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and
identification, ready for execution.
1.
2.
3.
C.
Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a
particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner.
Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide
specific rights for Owner.
Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and
properly executed.
Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a
written document using indicated form properly executed.
Refer to Divisions 02 through 33. Sections for specific content requirements and
particular requirements for submitting special warranties.
Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES
A.
General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents,
are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items
needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.
Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are
specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used
successfully in similar situations on other projects.
Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with
requirements of the Contract Documents.
Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make
selection.
Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications
establish salient characteristics of products.
Product Selection Procedures:
1.
2.
3.
Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the
named product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions
for Contractor's convenience will not be considered.
Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source,
provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements.
Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be
considered.
Products:
a.
b.
Restricted List:
Where Specifications include a list of names of both
manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed that complies with
requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience
will not be considered unless otherwise indicated.
Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both available
manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed
016000-3
016000
product, that complies with requirements.
Comply with requirements in
"Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product.
4.
Manufacturers:
a.
b.
5.
C.
2.2
Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product
indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or
indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers.
Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other
characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with requirements in
"Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the
other named manufacturers.
Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require "match Architect's sample",
provide a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's
decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches.
1.
D.
Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names,
provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with
requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience
will not be considered unless otherwise indicated.
Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of available manufacturers,
provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or a product by an unnamed
manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in
"Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed manufacturer's
product.
If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other
specified requirements, comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Substitution
Procedures" for proposal of product.
Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by
Architect from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complies with
requirements. Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's
product line that includes both standard and premium items.
COMPARABLE PRODUCTS
A.
Conditions for Consideration: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable
product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied,
Architect may return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these
requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract
Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the
indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work.
Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the
Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size,
durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.
Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty.
List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and
names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested.
Samples, if requested.
016000-4
016000
016000-5
017300
EXECUTION
SECTION 017300 - EXECUTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the
Work including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
B.
1.
2.
3.
1.2
Construction layout.
Field engineering and surveying.
Installation of the Work.
Cutting and patching.
Coordination of Owner-installed products.
Progress cleaning.
Starting and adjusting.
Protection of installed construction.
Correction of the Work.
Division 01 Section "Summary" for limits on use of Project site.
Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with
Project Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines
and levels, and final cleaning.
Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for patching penetrations in fire-rated
construction.
A.
Certificates: Submit certificate signed by professional engineer certifying that location and
elevation of improvements comply with requirements.
B.
Landfill Receipts: Submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility, licensed to accept
hazardous materials, for hazardous waste disposal.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to practice in
jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing land-surveying
services of the kind indicated.
B.
Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of
construction elements.
1.
Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, notify Architect of
locations and details of cutting and await directions from Architect before proceeding.
Shore, brace, and support structural element during cutting and patching. Do not cut and
patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or
increase deflection
017300-1
017300
EXECUTION
2.
3.
4.
Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components
in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in
increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.
Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or
components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in
reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance
or decreased operational life or safety.
Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual
evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a
manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities.
Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually
unsatisfactory manner. Overcuts are not allowed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.
1.
B.
For projects requiring compliance with sustainable design and construction practices and
procedures, use products for patching that comply with requirements of Division 01
sustainable design requirements Section.
In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed
surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent
possible.
1.
If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when
installed, will provide a match acceptable to Architect for the visual and functional
performance of in-place materials.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and
construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate
and verify the existence and location of underground utilities, mechanical and electrical
systems, and other construction affecting the Work.
1.
2.
B.
Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of
sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; underground electrical services,
and other utilities.
Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities
serving Project site.
Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the
Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where
indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions
affecting performance. Record observations.
017300-2
017300
EXECUTION
1.
2.
3.
C.
3.2
Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of
connections before equipment and fixture installation.
Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are
to be installed.
Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing
finishes or primers.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding
with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
PREPARATION
A.
Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to Owner that is necessary to adjust, move, or
relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances
located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck
measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to
other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before
fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the
Work.
C.
Space Requirements:
Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown
diagrammatically on Drawings. All clearances should take into account final wall and floor
finishes including base.
D.
Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for
clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control of
Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect according to requirements in
Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination."
3.3
CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT
A.
Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on
Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are
discovered, notify Architect and Owner promptly.
B.
General: Engage a land surveyor or professional engineer to lay out the Work using accepted
surveying practices.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of
construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project.
Establish limits on use of Project site.
Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain
required dimensions.
Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply.
Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses.
Notify Architect and Owner when deviations from required lines and levels exceed
allowable tolerances.
Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established
by authorities having jurisdiction.
017300-3
017300
EXECUTION
C.
Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill
and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and rim and invert elevations.
D.
Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building
foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and
electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels.
Level foundations and piers from two or more locations.
E.
Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and
levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name
and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log
available for reference by Architect and Owner.
3.4
FIELD ENGINEERING
A.
Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference
points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control
points during construction operations.
B.
Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on Project
site, referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having
jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark.
1.
Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record
Documents.
C.
Certified Survey: On completion of foundation walls, major site improvements, and other work
requiring field-engineering services, prepare a certified survey showing dimensions, locations,
angles, and elevations of construction and sitework.
D.
Final Property Survey: Engage a land surveyor or professional engineer to prepare a final
property survey showing significant features (real property) for Project. Include on the survey a
certification, signed by land surveyor or professional engineer, that principal metes, bounds,
lines, and levels of Project are accurately positioned as shown on the survey.
1.
3.5
Recording: At Substantial Completion, have the final property survey recorded by or with
authorities having jurisdiction as the official "property survey."
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and
elevation, as indicated.
1.
2.
3.
Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level.
Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance
and ease of removal for replacement.
Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in
applications indicated.
C.
Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results.
Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.
017300-4
017300
EXECUTION
D.
Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or
loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.
E.
Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction
items on site and placement in permanent locations.
F.
Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.
G.
Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be
factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that
adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated
requirements.
H.
Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate
size and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned
with other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify
size and type required for load conditions.
1.
2.
3.
Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at
heights directed by Architect.
Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction.
Coordinate installation of anchorages.
Furnish setting drawings, templates, and
directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and
items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver
such items to Project site in time for installation.
I.
Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated,
arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.
J.
Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered
hazardous.
3.6
CUTTING AND PATCHING
A.
Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching.
Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.
1.
Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance
of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their
original condition. No trench overcuts are allowed at finished slab areas.
B.
Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or
damaged during installation or cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials
so as not to void existing warranties.
C.
Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut.
D.
Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage.
Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be
exposed during cutting and patching operations.
E.
Adjacent Occupied Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free
passage to adjoining areas.
017300-5
017300
EXECUTION
F.
Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems
are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before
cutting to minimize interruption to occupied areas.
G.
Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar
operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or
adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply
with original Installer's written recommendations.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
H.
Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations
following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as
practicable. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other
Sections, where applicable.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
I.
3.7
In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not
hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with
minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.
Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces.
Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a
diamond-core drill.
Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 31 Sections
where required by cutting and patching operations.
Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be
removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent
entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.
Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.
Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to
demonstrate physical integrity of installation.
Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish
restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize evidence of
patching and refinishing.
Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area
into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even
surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall
coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and
appearance.
Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an evenplane surface of uniform appearance.
Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a
weathertight condition and ensures thermal and moisture integrity of building enclosure.
Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint,
mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces.
PROGRESS CLEANING
A.
General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas.
requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.
1.
2.
Enforce
Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and
debris.
Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if
the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F.
017300-6
017300
EXECUTION
3.
Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste.
Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.
B.
Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.
C.
Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for
proper execution of the Work.
1.
2.
Remove liquid spills promptly.
Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the
entire work area, as appropriate.
D.
Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written
instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials
specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning
materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed
surfaces.
E.
Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.
F.
Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to
ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
G.
Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste materials
down sewers or into waterways.
H.
During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining
materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from
damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.
I.
Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through
the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure
operability without damaging effects.
J.
Limiting Exposures:
Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the
construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or
otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.
3.8
STARTING AND ADJUSTING
A.
Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation.
malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.
B.
Adjust equipment for proper operation.
without binding.
C.
Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties.
Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
D.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Division 01 Section
"Quality Requirements."
Remove
Adjust operating components for proper operation
017300-7
017300
3.9
EXECUTION
PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION
A.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or
deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
B.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.
017300-8
017419
SECTION 017419 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:
1.
B.
1.
1.2
Disposing of nonhazardous demolition and construction waste.
Division 02 Section "Selective Structure Demolition" for removal of selected portions of
building or structure.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting
from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes
packaging.
B.
Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale,
recycling, reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.3
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Waste Management Plan: Submit plan within 7
Award.
days of date established for
the Notice of
WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN
A.
Waste Identification: Indicate anticipated types and quantities of demolition and construction
waste generated by the Work. Include estimated quantities and assumptions for estimates.
1.
Disposed Materials: Indicate how and where materials will be disposed of.
name, address, and telephone number of each landfill and incinerator facility.
Include
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PLAN IMPLEMENTATION
A.
General: Implement approved waste management plan. Provide handling, containers, storage,
signage, transportation, and other items as required to implement waste management plan
during the entire duration of the Contract.
017419-1
017419
B.
Training:
Train workers, subcontractors, and suppliers on proper waste management
procedures, as appropriate for the Work occurring at Project site.
C.
Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to ensure
minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and
used facilities.
1.
3.2
Comply with Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for controlling dust
and dirt, environmental protection, and noise control.
DISPOSAL OF WASTE
A.
General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove
waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
2.
Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of
accumulate on-site.
Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces
and areas.
B.
Burning: Do not burn waste materials.
C.
Disposal: Remove waste materials from Owner's property and legally dispose of them.
017419-2
017700
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
SECTION 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including,
but not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
1.
2.
3.
1.2
Substantial Completion procedures.
Final completion procedures.
Warranties.
Final cleaning.
Repair of the Work.
Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance
manual requirements.
Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record
Specifications, and record Product Data.
Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements
for the Work in those Sections.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For cleaning agents.
B.
Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion.
C.
Certified List of Incomplete Items: Final submittal at Final Completion.
1.3
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Certificates of Release: From authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Certificate of Insurance: For continuing coverage.
C.
Field Report: For pest control inspection.
1.4
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: For maintenance material submittal items specified in
other Sections.
017700-1
017700
1.5
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES
A.
Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and
corrected (Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why
the Work is incomplete.
B.
Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior
to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that
are incomplete at time of request.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdiction
permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities.
Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.
Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 01 Sections, including project
record documents, operation and maintenance manuals, final completion construction
photographic documentation, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and
similar final record information.
Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Divisions 02 through 33 Sections,
including specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final
certifications, and similar documents.
Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Divisions 02 through 33
Sections, including tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to
location designated by Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number
where applicable.
a.
5.
6.
7.
C.
Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: Prepare and submit schedule of
maintenance material submittal items, including name and quantity of each item
and name and number of related Specification Section. Obtain Owner's signature
for receipt of submittals.
Submit test/adjust/balance records.
Submit sustainable design submittals required in Division 01 sustainable design
requirements Section and in individual Division 02 through 33 Sections.
Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and
maintenance.
Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days
prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below
that are incomplete at time of request.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.
Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner
and Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions.
Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment.
Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial Completion.
Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products,
equipment, and systems.
Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities.
Participate with Owner in conducting inspection and walkthrough with local emergency
responders.
Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups,
construction tools, and similar elements.
Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting.
Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual
defects.
017700-2
017700
D.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to determine Substantial Completion a
minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and
tests. On receipt of request, Owner will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of
unfulfilled requirements. Owner will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after
inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items
identified by Owner, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.
1.
2.
1.6
Re-inspection: Request re-inspection when the Work identified in previous inspections
as incomplete is completed or corrected.
Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final completion.
FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES
A.
Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining final completion,
complete the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to determine acceptance. On receipt of
request, Owner will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled
requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify
Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.
1.
1.7
Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 01 Section "Payment
Procedures."
Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial
Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed
and dated by Architect. Certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been
completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.
Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage
complying with insurance requirements.
Submit pest-control final inspection report and warranty.
Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products,
equipment, and systems.
Re-inspection: Request re-inspection when the Work identified in previous inspections
as incomplete is completed or corrected.
LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)
A.
1.8
Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by
construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if
necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.
SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES
A.
Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of Owner for designated portions of the
Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is
indicated, or when delay in submittal of warranties might limit Owner's rights under warranty.
B.
Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the
Project Manual.
017700-3
017700
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
1.
C.
Warranty Electronic File: Scan warranties and bonds and assemble complete warranty
and bond submittal package into a single indexed electronic PDF file with links enabling
navigation to each item. Provide bookmarked table of contents at beginning of
document.
Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or
fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially
hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.
1.
Use cleaning products that comply with Green Seal's GS-37, or if GS-37 is not
applicable, use products that comply with the California Code of Regulations maximum
allowable VOC levels.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
FINAL CLEANING
A.
General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply
with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution
regulations.
B.
Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each
surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and
maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification
of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities,
including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and
other foreign substances.
Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other
foreign deposits.
Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured
surface.
Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from
Project site.
Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building.
Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition,
free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural
weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original
condition.
Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs,
plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.
Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces.
017700-4
017700
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
C.
3.2
Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; clean
according to manufacturer's recommendations if visible soil or stains remain.
Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows.
Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials.
Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials.
Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.
Remove labels that are not permanent.
Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment and similar equipment.
Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign
substances.
Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains
resulting from water exposure.
Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed
surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills.
Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency.
Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.
Pest Control: Comply with pest control requirements in Division 01 Section "Temporary
Facilities and Controls." Prepare written report.
REPAIR OF THE WORK
A.
Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for determination of
Substantial Completion.
B.
Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Repairing includes replacing defective
parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly
adjusting operating equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be repaired or restored,
provide replacements. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired.
Restore damaged construction and permanent facilities used during construction to specified
condition.
1.
2.
Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass, reflective surfaces, and other
damaged transparent materials.
Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and surfaces.
Replace finishes and surfaces that that already show evidence of repair or restoration.
a.
3.
4.
Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including
mechanical and electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied to required labels
and identification.
Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede
operation or reduce longevity.
Replace burned-out bulbs, bulbs noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and
noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for
new fixtures.
017700-5
017823
SECTION 017823 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and
maintenance manuals, including the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
1.
1.2
Operation and maintenance documentation directory.
Emergency manuals.
Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment.
Product maintenance manuals.
Systems and equipment maintenance manuals.
Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific operation and maintenance manual
requirements for the Work in those Sections.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Manual Content: Operations and maintenance manual content is specified in individual
Specification Sections to be reviewed at the time of Section submittals. Submit reviewed
manual content formatted and organized as required by this Section.
1.
2.
B.
Owner will comment on whether content of operations and maintenance submittals are
acceptable.
Where applicable, clarify and update reviewed manual content to correspond to revisions
and field conditions.
Format: Submit operations and maintenance manuals in the following format:
1.
PDF electronic file. Assemble each manual into a composite electronically indexed file.
Submit on digital media acceptable to Architect.
a.
2.
C.
Name each indexed document file in composite electronic index with applicable
item name. Include a complete electronically linked operation and maintenance
directory.
Three paper copies. Include a complete operation and maintenance directory. Enclose
title pages and directories in clear plastic sleeves. Owner, will return two copies.
Manual Submittal: Submit each manual in final form prior to requesting inspection for
Substantial Completion and at least 15 days before commencing demonstration and training.
Owner will return copy with comments.
1.
Correct or revise each manual to comply with Owner’s comments. Submit copies of each
corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Owner's comments and prior to
commencing demonstration and training.
017823-1
017823
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A.
Directory:
Prepare a single, comprehensive directory of emergency, operation, and
maintenance data and materials, listing items and their location to facilitate ready access to
desired information.
B.
Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for
each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a
system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed:
1.
2.
3.
C.
Title page.
Table of contents.
Manual contents.
Title Page: Include the following information:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Subject matter included in manual.
Name and address of Project.
Name and address of Owner.
Date of submittal.
Name and contact information for Contractor.
Name and contact information for Owner.
Name and contact information for Architect.
Name and contact information for Commissioning Authority.
Names and contact information for major consultants to the Architect that designed the
systems contained in the manuals.
Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.
D.
Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to
the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project
Manual.
E.
Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by
system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems,
equipment, and components of one system into a single binder.
F.
Manuals, Electronic Files: Submit manuals in the form of a multiple file composite electronic
PDF file for each manual type required.
1.
2.
G.
Electronic Files: Use electronic files prepared by manufacturer where available. Where
scanning of paper documents is required, configure scanned file for minimum readable
file size.
File Names and Bookmarks: Enable bookmarking of individual documents based on file
names. Name document files to correspond to system, subsystem, and equipment
names used in manual directory and table of contents. Group documents for each
system and subsystem into individual composite bookmarked files, then create composite
manual, so that resulting bookmarks reflect the system, subsystem, and equipment
names in a readily navigated file tree. Configure electronic manual to display bookmark
panel on opening file.
Manuals, Paper Copy: Submit manuals in the form of hard copy, bound and labeled volumes.
017823-2
017823
1.
2.
Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic
software storage media for computerized electronic equipment.
Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text.
a.
b.
2.2
If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and
use as foldouts.
If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled
envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in
manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents,
and drawing locations.
EMERGENCY MANUALS
A.
Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Type of emergency.
Emergency instructions.
Emergency procedures.
Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include
instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Fire.
Flood.
Gas leak.
Water leak.
Power failure.
Water outage.
System, subsystem, or equipment failure.
Chemical release or spill.
C.
Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages,
and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for
notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties.
D.
Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.3
Instructions on stopping.
Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency.
Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits.
Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
Special operating instructions and procedures.
OPERATION MANUALS
A.
Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in
individual Specification Sections and the following information:
1.
2.
3.
4.
System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Use designations for systems and
equipment indicated on Contract Documents.
Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility.
Operating standards.
Operating procedures.
017823-3
017823
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
B.
Descriptions: Include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
C.
Operating logs.
Wiring diagrams.
Control diagrams.
Piped system diagrams.
Precautions against improper use.
License requirements including inspection and renewal dates.
Product name and model number. Use designations for products indicated on Contract
Documents.
Manufacturer's name.
Equipment identification with serial number of each component.
Equipment function.
Operating characteristics.
Limiting conditions.
Performance curves.
Engineering data and tests.
Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.
Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Startup procedures.
Equipment or system break-in procedures.
Routine and normal operating instructions.
Regulation and control procedures.
Instructions on stopping.
Normal shutdown instructions.
Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.
Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
Special operating instructions and procedures.
D.
Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls
as installed.
E.
Piped Systems:
identification.
2.4
Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for
PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A.
Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish.
Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and
sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below.
B.
Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and
arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and
telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference
Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.
C.
Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:
1.
2.
3.
Product name and model number.
Manufacturer's name.
Color, pattern, and texture.
017823-4
017823
4.
5.
D.
Material and chemical composition.
Reordering information for specially manufactured products.
Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Inspection procedures.
Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.
List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.
Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance.
Repair instructions.
E.
Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and
related services.
F.
Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and
conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.
2.5
SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A.
Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include
source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures,
maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance
service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below.
B.
Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual,
identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each
product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance
service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.
C.
Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation
including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment:
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Maintenance Procedures:
maintenance procedures:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
E.
Standard maintenance instructions and bulletins.
Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly
and component removal, replacement, and assembly.
Identification and nomenclature of parts and components.
List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.
Include the following information and items that detail essential
Test and inspection instructions.
Troubleshooting guide.
Precautions against improper maintenance.
Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions.
Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions.
Demonstration and training video recording, if available.
Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of
required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine
maintenance and service with standard time allotment.
017823-5
017823
F.
Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with
parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local
sources of maintenance materials and related services.
G.
Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and
telephone number of service agent.
H.
Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and
conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
MANUAL PREPARATION
A.
Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures
for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies
indicated.
B.
Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care
and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.
C.
Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance
data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment
not part of a system.
D.
Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include
only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each
product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a
tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents.
Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.
E.
Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the
relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence
and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in record Drawings to
ensure correct illustration of completed installation.
1.
F.
Do not use original project record documents as part of operation and maintenance
manuals.
Comply with Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation
and maintenance documentation.
017823-6
017839
SECTION 017839 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents,
including the following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
1.
2.
1.2
Record Drawings.
Record Specifications.
Record Product Data.
Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance
manual requirements.
Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific requirements for project record documents
of the Work in those Sections.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Record Drawings: Comply with the following:
1.
Number of Copies: Submit one set(s) of marked-up record prints.
B.
Record Specifications: Submit one paper copy
and contract modifications.
of Project's Specifications, including addenda
C.
Record Product Data: Submit one paper copy of each submittal.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
RECORD DRAWINGS
A.
Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop
Drawings, incorporating new and revised Drawings as modifications are issued.
1.
Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies
from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data,
whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide
information for preparation of corresponding marked-up record prints.
a.
b.
c.
Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be
difficult to identify or measure and record later.
Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it.
Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations.
017839-1
017839
2.
3.
4.
2.2
Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Use
personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up record
prints.
Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish
between changes for different categories of the Work at same location.
Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order
numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.
RECORD SPECIFICATIONS
A.
Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation
varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
2.3
Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that
cannot be readily identified and recorded later.
Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and
equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.
Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to
provide a record of selections made.
Note related Change Orders, record Product Data, and record Drawings where
applicable.
Format: Submit record Specifications as [annotated PDF electronic file] [paper copy] [scanned
PDF electronic file(s) of marked-up paper copy of Specifications].
RECORD PRODUCT DATA
A.
Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation
varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal.
1.
2.
3.
B.
2.4
Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that
cannot be readily identified and recorded later.
Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in
manufacturer's written instructions for installation.
Note related Change Orders, record Specifications, and record Drawings where
applicable.
Format: Submit record Product Data as [annotated PDF electronic file] [paper copy] [scanned
PDF electronic file(s) of marked-up paper copy of Product Data].
MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS
A.
Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous
record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file
miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.
B.
Format: Submit miscellaneous record submittals as paper copy .
017839-2
017839
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE
A.
Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project
record document purposes. Post changes and revisions to project record documents as they
occur; do not wait until end of Project.
B.
Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store record documents and Samples in the
field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record
documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean,
dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record
documents for Architect's and Owner's reference during normal working hours.
017839-3
024119
SECTION 024119 - SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
1.2
Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure.
Demolition and removal of selected site elements.
Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site unless
indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.
B.
Remove and Salvage: Carefully detach from existing construction, in a manner to prevent
damage, and deliver to Owner ready for reuse.
C.
Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare for reuse, and reinstall
where indicated.
D.
Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be permanently removed and
that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and
reinstalled.
1.3
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Landfill Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes by a landfill facility
licensed to accept hazardous wastes.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.5
Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications:
program.
Certified by an EPA-approved certification
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding
with selective demolition.
B.
Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the
Work.
1.
If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify
Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate
contract.
024119-1
024119
C.
Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.
D.
Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against
damage during selective demolition operations.
1.
1.6
Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.
WARRANTY
A.
Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or
damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing
warranties.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PEFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Regulatory Requirements:
Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before
beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities
having jurisdiction.
B.
Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition
operations.
B.
Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of
selective demolition required.
C.
When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended
function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict.
Promptly submit a written report to Architect and Owner.
D.
Perform an engineering survey of condition of building to determine whether removing any
element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of structure or
adjacent structures during selective building demolition operations.
3.2
UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
A.
Existing Services/Systems to Remain:
protect them against damage.
1.
Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and
Comply with requirements for existing services/systems interruptions specified in
Division 01 Section "Summary."
024119-2
024119
B.
Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify,
disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems
serving areas to be selectively demolished.
1.
2.
3.
Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies.
If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide
temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain
continuity of services/systems to other parts of building.
Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC
systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
C.
3.3
Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap
or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.
Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same
or compatible piping material.
Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment.
Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and
remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and
make equipment operational.
Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and
remove equipment and deliver to Owner.
Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug
remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.
Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible
ductwork material.
Refrigerant: Remove refrigerant from mechanical equipment to be selectively demolished
according to 40 CFR 82 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
PREPARATION
A.
Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal
operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other
adjacent occupied and used facilities.
1.
Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in Division 01 Section
"Temporary Facilities and Controls."
B.
Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent
injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.
C.
Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required
to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes
to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction
being demolished.
3.4
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL
A.
General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new
construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of
governing regulations and as follows:
024119-3
024119
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Removed and Salvaged Items:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Clean salvaged items.
Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers.
Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner.
Transport items to Owner's storage area on-site .
Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
Removed and Reinstalled Items:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.5
Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use
cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction.
Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and
chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to
remain. No overcutting is allowed.
Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring
existing finished surfaces.
Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At
concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of
hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable fire-suppression
devices during flame-cutting operations.
Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to
impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.
Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. Comply with requirements in
Division 01 Section "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."
Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse.
Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers.
Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new
materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials
necessary to make item functional for use indicated.
DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS
A.
General: Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or
otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project
site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.
Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces
and areas.
Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will
convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.
Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Construction Waste
Management and Disposal."
B.
Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.
C.
Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.
024119-4
024119
3.6
CLEANING
A.
Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective
demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition
operations began.
024119-5
033000
SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
This Section specifies cast-in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete
materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
1.3
Division 5 Section “Metal Fabrications” for embedded items.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.
Include manufacturer’s specifications with application an installation instructions for
proprietary material, including admixtures, bonding agents, curing compounds and
chemical hardeners.
B.
Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture.
C.
Shop Drawings: For steel fabrication, bending and placement of concrete reinforcement.
Material mill test certificates for reinforcement and cement.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete
products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and
equipment.
1.
B.
ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract
Documents:
1.
2.
C.
Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete
Production Facilities."
ACI 347, “Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork.”
ACI SP-15, “Field Reference Manual;” keep in field office during construction.
Perform sampling and testing for field quality control during the placements of concrete as
follows:
1.
2.
3.
Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C172, except modified for slump to comply wIth ASTM
C94.
Slump: ASTM C143, one test for each set of compressive strength test specimens.
Air Content: ASTM C231, pressure method; one test each set of compressive test
specimens, or when the indication of change requires.
033000-1
033000
4.
5.
1.5
Compressive Test Specimens: ASTM C311, one set of 6 standard cylinders for each
compressive strength test, unless otherwise directed.
Cast and store cylinders for laboratory cured test specimens and field-cured test
specimens as specified in ASTM C31.
INSPECTION
A.
1.6
Provide free access for Architect and Engineer to locations where concrete materials are stored,
proportioned or mixed. Do not place concrete until forming and reinforcing for a given pour has
been observed by the Engineer. Give minimum 24 hours advance notice for inspection to
Architect and Engineer, but only when forming and reinforcing are substantially complete at time
of notification.
TESTING
A.
1.7
Employ the services of a qualified testing laboratory as approved by the Architect to perform
specified tests. Costs for these services will be paid by the Owner, except as otherwise
specified.
COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH TESTS
A.
1.8
ASTM C39; 1 set for each 50 cubic yards or fraction thereof for each mix design placed in any 1
day; 2 specimens tested at 7 days, 3 specimens tested at 28 days, and 1 specimen retained in
reserve for later testing if required.
EVALUATION OF QUALITY CONTROL TESTS
A.
Do not use concrete delivered to the final point of placement which has slump or total air
content outside the specified values.
B.
Compressive strength tests for laboratory-cured cylinders will be considered satisfactory if the
averages of all sets of 3 consecutive compressive strength tests results equal or exceed the 28day design compressive strength of the type or class of concrete; and no individual strength test
falls below the required compressive strength by more than 500 psi.
C.
If the compressive strength test fail to meet the minimum requirements specified, the concrete
represented by such tests will b e considered deficient in strength and subject to additional
testing as herein specified, or removal and replacement of the concrete which the test
represents. Tests of compressive strengths at ages less than 28 days will be similarly
evaluated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
FORM-FACING MATERIALS
A.
Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material.
Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.
033000-2
033000
2.2
STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A.
Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed.
1.
2.
Ties and deformed anchors , Grade 40.
Bars to be welded shall conform to ASTM A706.
B.
Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 497, flat sheet.
C.
Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and
fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports
from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."
2.3
CONCRETE MATERIALS
A.
Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and
source, throughout Project:
1.
Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I/II.
a.
b.
B.
Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F, maximum of 20% by weight.
Revise cement type when required if exposed to chlorides or soil sulfates.
Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, graded, 3/4-inch nominal maximum coarse-aggregate
size.
1.
Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.
C.
Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable.
D.
Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.
E.
Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other
admixtures and with floor finishes and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions
exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures
containing calcium chloride.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
F.
2.4
Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A.
Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B.
Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D.
High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F.
High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G.
Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.
Synthetic Fiber: fibrillated polypropylene fibers engineered and designed for use in concrete
pavement, complying with ASTM C 1116, Type III, 1/2 to 1 inch long.
VAPOR RETARDERS
A.
Plastic Vapor Retarder:
ASTM E 1745, Class A, extruded, 15 mils. thick.
manufacturer's recommended adhesive or pressure-sensitive tape.
B.
Performance:
Include
033000-3
033000
1.
2.
2.5
Water vapor permeance: ASTM F1249, 0.0084 perms.
Puncture resistance: Minimum 2300 grams measured per ASTM 1709, Method B.
CURING MATERIALS
A.
Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application
to fresh concrete.
B.
Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing
approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. when dry.
C.
Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.
D.
Water: Potable.
E.
Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound:
dissipating, VOC compliant.
F.
Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, Type 1,
Class A.
2.6
ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B,
RELATED MATERIALS
A.
Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber.
B.
Bond Breaker: Provide 2 layers of 15# non-bituminous felt between slab edge and vertical wall
and column surfaces.
2.7
CONCRETE MIXTURES
A.
Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete determined by either laboratory
trial mix or field test data bases, as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Proportion normal-weight concrete according to ACE 211.1 and ACI 301. Submit design
mixes for review at least 3 weeks prior to use, indicating calculations for standard
deviation for previously used samples.
Class 1: For footings 3.000 psi (min.), 517 lbs. of Type I/II cement/cubic yard (min.), W/C
0.50 (max.), maximum aggregate size ¾”, 2” to 4” slump, air entrained 5% to 7%.
Class II: For slabs on grade, slabs on metal deck, 3500 psi (min.), 540 lbs. of Type I/II
cement/cubic yard (min.), W/C 0.46 max., 2” to 4” slump, air 3% (max).
Class III: For exterior flatwork, 4000 psi (min.), 564 lbs. of Type II Portland cement/cubic
yard (min.), 2” to 4” slump, air entrained 6% to 8%, ACI water/cement ratio.
B.
Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs
for the laboratory trial mix basis.
C.
Proportion normal-weight concrete mixes as shown on the Structural Drawings.
D.
Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitous materials other than
Portland cement in concrete as follows:
1.
Fly Ash: 20 %, max.
033000-4
033000
E.
Design mixes shall contain admixtures required by these specification and proposed by the
contractor to be used in concrete.
F.
Proportion concrete design mixes so that compressive strength of laboratory cured cylinders will
be at least 15% greater than minimum specified strength. Make at laws six specimens for each
design mix in accordance with ASTM C192. Test 3 specimens at 7 day and 3 at 28 days in
accordance with ASTM C39.
G.
Submit written reports of design mix for each class of concrete at least 15 days prior to start of
work. Include the following in each report;
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
H.
In lieu of designing new mixes for this project, existing mix designs meeting all requirements
specified for each concrete mix, and used successfully on previous projects under conditions
similar to those anticipated on this project, may be used providing the following are submitted
for Architect/Engineer’s approval for each class of concrete:
1.
2.
3.
2.8
Project identification
Concrete class
Specified properties for concrete
Source of concrete aggregate and cement
Cement type and brand
Manufacturer and brand name of admixtures
Proportions of conctete mixed per cubic yard
Test results for each property specified for design mix
Unit weight
Reports of concrete mix design and test results.
Reports of sufficient consecutive sets of 28 day concrete strength tests made during the
last 6 months and calculations for standard deviation.
Reports of compliance tests of fine and coarse aggregates made during the last 6
months.
FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT
A.
2.9
Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."
CONCRETE MIXING
A.
Ready-Mixed Concrete:
Measure, batch, mix, and
ASTM C 94/C 94M, and furnish batch ticket information.
1.
deliver
concrete
according
to
When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from
1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and
delivery time to 60 minutes.
033000-5
033000
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
FORMWORK
A.
Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork according to ACI 301 to support vertical,
lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure
can support such loads.
B.
Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment,
elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.
C.
Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete.
3.2
EMBEDDED ITEMS
A.
Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work
that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates,
diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
1.
B.
Embedded items may include, but are not limited to:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
3.3
Install anchor rods, accurately located, to the elevations required.
Bolts
Connectors
Plates
Anchors
Sleeves
Drains
Electrical boxes
VAPOR RETARDERS
A.
Plastic Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair vapor retarders according to ASTM E 1643
and manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
3.4
Lap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape.
STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A.
General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement.
1.
3.5
Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before
placing concrete.
JOINTS
A.
General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.
033000-6
033000
B.
Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at
locations indicated or as approved by Architect.
C.
Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning
concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least onefourth of concrete thickness as follows:
1.
2.
D.
3.6
Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing
each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after
applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces.
Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof
abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inchwide joints into concrete when cutting
action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops
random contraction cracks.
Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab
junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and
other locations, as indicated.
CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A.
Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items
is complete and that required inspections have been performed.
B.
Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new
concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of
weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated.
Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.
1.
Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301.
C.
Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1.
D.
Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 305.
3.7
FINISHING FORMED SURFACES
A.
Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes
and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified
limits on formed-surface irregularities.
1.
B.
Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in
an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and
defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface
irregularities.
1.
C.
Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view.
Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view, or to be covered with a coating or
covering material applied directly to concrete.
Rubbed Finish:
indicated:
Apply the following to smooth-formed finished as-cast concrete where
033000-7
033000
1.
2.
3.
D.
3.8
Smooth-Rubbed Finish: Not later than one day after form removal, moisten concrete
surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive until producing a uniform
color and texture. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing
process.
Grout-Cleaned Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply grout of a consistency of thick
paint to coat surfaces and fill small holes. Mix one part portland cement to one and onehalf parts fine sand with a 1:1 mixture of bonding admixture and water. Add white
portland cement in amounts determined by trial patches so color of dry grout will match
adjacent surfaces. Scrub grout into voids and remove excess grout. When grout
whitens, rub surface with clean burlap and keep surface damp by fog spray for at least 36
hours.
Cork-Floated Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply a stiff grout. Mix one part portland
cement and one part fine sand with a 1:1 mixture of bonding agent and water. Add white
portland cement in amounts determined by trial patches so color of dry grout will match
adjacent surfaces. Compress grout into voids by grinding surface. In a swirling motion,
finish surface with a cork float.
Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces
adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent
formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent
unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS
A.
General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and
finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.
B.
Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or
inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots.
Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular
texture.
1.
C.
Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand
or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of
trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that
would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings.
1.
2.
D.
Apply a trowel finish to surfaces to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or
quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin-film-finish coating
system.
Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and an
unleveled, freestanding, 10-foot- long straightedge resting on 2 high spots and placed
anywhere on the surface does not exceed 3/16 inch
Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a first trowel finish to surfaces where ceramic or quarry
tile is to be installed by either thickset or thin-set method. While concrete is still plastic, slightly
scarify surface with a fine broom.
1.
E.
Apply float finish to surfaces to receive trowel finish.
Comply with flatness and levelness tolerances for trowel finished floor surfaces.
Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and ramps, and
elsewhere as indicated.
033000-8
033000
3.9
CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING
A.
General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 305 for hot-weather
protection during curing.
B.
Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or
windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing
operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and
bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.
C.
Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods:
1.
2.
3.
Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days.
Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover
for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at
least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven
days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material
and waterproof tape.
Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller
according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall
within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair
damage during curing period.
a.
4.
3.10
A.
3.11
A.
After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without damaging
concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound
manufacturer unless manufacturer certifies curing compound will not interfere with
bonding of floor covering used on Project.
Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a
continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial
application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity
of coating and repair damage during curing period.
CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS
Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove
and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting
agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
1.
Testing Services: Tests shall be performed according to ACI 301.
033000-9
055000
METAL FABRICATIONS
SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section:
1.
2.
3.
1.2
Miscellaneous steel framing and supports.
Prefabricated building columns.
Shelf angles.
Metal ladders.
Miscellaneous steel trim.
Metal bollards.
Loose bearing and leveling plates.
Loose steel lintels.
Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted-channel inserts, and wedge-type inserts
indicated to be cast into concrete or built into unit masonry.
Steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Delegated Design: Design ladders, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a
qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.
B.
Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature
changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints,
overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For the following:
1.
2.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal fabrications.
1.
C.
Paint products.
Grout.
Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their
connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.
Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance
requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified
professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
055000-1
055000
METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
METALS, GENERAL
A.
2.2
Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes.
FERROUS METALS
A.
Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
B.
Stainless-Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 304.
C.
Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold-formed steel tubing.
D.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated.
2.3
FASTENERS
A.
General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 or Type 316 stainless-steel fasteners
for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or
ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls.
B.
Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Threaded type unless otherwise indicated; galvanized
ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron. Provide bolts, washers, and shims
as needed, all hot-dip galvanized per ASTM F 2329.
C.
Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors.
1.
2.
2.4
Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with
ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated.
Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel is Indicated: Stainless-steel
bolts, ASTM F 593, and nuts, ASTM F 594.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 09 painting Sections.
B.
Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer
complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.
C.
Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and
compatible with paints specified to be used over it.
D.
Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
E.
Non-shrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, non-staining, noncorrosive, nongaseous
grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer
for interior and exterior applications.
055000-2
055000
F.
2.5
METAL FABRICATIONS
Concrete: Comply with requirements in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for
normal-weight, air-entrained, concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000
psi, unless otherwise specified.
FABRICATION, GENERAL
A.
Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Use connections
that maintain structural value of joined pieces.
B.
Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges. Remove
sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.
C.
Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
Remove welding flux immediately.
At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended.
D.
Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or
welds where possible. Locate joints where least conspicuous.
E.
Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude
water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.
F.
Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally
welded steel strap anchors not less than 24 inches o.c.
2.6
MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
A.
General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to
complete the Work.
B.
Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise
indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive
adjacent construction.
2.7
METAL LADDERS
A.
General:
1.
B.
Comply with ANSI A14.3 unless otherwise indicated.
Steel Ladders:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Space siderails 18 inches apart unless otherwise indicated.
Siderails: Continuous, 1-1/2-inch pipe rails, 1.9-inch O.D.
Rungs: 1-inch X 1-inch tube steel.
Fit rungs in centerline of siderails; plug-weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces.
Provide nonslip abrasive surfaces on top of each rung.
055000-3
055000
METAL FABRICATIONS
6.
2.8
Prime ladders, including brackets and fasteners, with primer specified in Division 09
Section "High-Performance Coatings."
MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM
A.
Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown
with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed
field splices where possible.
B.
Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation
with other work.
C.
Galvanize exterior miscellaneous steel trim.
D.
Prime exterior miscellaneous steel trim with primer specified in Division 09 Section "HighPerformance Coatings."
2.9
METAL BOLLARDS
A.
Fabricate metal bollards from Schedule 80 steel pipe.
B.
Fabricate sleeves for bollard anchorage from steel pipe or tubing with 1/4-inch- thick steel plate
welded to bottom of sleeve.
C.
Prime bollards with zinc-rich primer.
2.10
A.
2.11
A.
2.12
LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES
Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on concrete construction. Drill
plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting.
STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES
Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported from
concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with no fewer than
two integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete.
FINISHES, GENERAL
A.
Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B.
Finish metal fabrications after assembly.
2.13
A.
STEEL AND IRON FINISHES
Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for steel
and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products.
055000-4
055000
METAL FABRICATIONS
B.
Shop prime iron and steel items not indicated to be galvanized unless they are to be embedded
in concrete or masonry, or unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Preparation for Shop Priming:
Cleaning."
D.
Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification
No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.
Prepare surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal
fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges
and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and
levels.
B.
Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are
not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after
fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.
C.
Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
Remove welding flux immediately.
At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended.
D.
Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal
fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction.
E.
Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete,
masonry, or similar construction.
3.2
INSTALLING METAL BOLLARDS
A.
Anchor bollards in place with concrete footings. Place concrete and vibrate or tamp for
consolidation. Support and brace bollards in position until concrete has cured.
B.
Fill bollards solidly with concrete, mounding top surface to shed water.
3.3
INSTALLING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES
A.
Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to
improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates.
055000-5
055000
METAL FABRICATIONS
B.
Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members
have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but,
if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with grout.
C.
Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain.
3.4
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop
painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
B.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair
galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.
055000-6
061053
SECTION 061053 - MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.2
Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs.
Wood blocking, cants, and nailers.
Wood furring and grounds.
Wood sleepers.
Plywood backing panels.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product.
1.
B.
Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements.
Research/Evaluation Reports:
effect for Project:
1.
2.
For the following, showing compliance with building code in
Preservative-treated wood.
Power-driven fasteners.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A.
Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency
is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency
certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the
ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.
1.
2.2
Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.
WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS
A.
Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use category UC2 [for interior
construction not in contact with the ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in
contact with the ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with the ground],
B.
Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic
or chromium.
061053-1
061053
C.
Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use
material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material.
D.
Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board
of Review.
E.
Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:
1.
2.
3.
2.3
Wood cants, furring, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and
similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.
Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in
contact with masonry or concrete.
Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs-on-grade.
MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
A.
General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other
construction, including the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Blocking.
Nailers.
Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs.
Cants.
Furring.
Grounds.
B.
For items of dimension lumber size, provide Standard, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber with 19
percent maximum moisture content of any species.
C.
For exposed boards, provide lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content of eastern
white pine, Idaho white, lodgepole, ponderosa, or sugar pine; Premium or 2 Common (Sterling)
grade; NeLMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
2.4
PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS
A.
2.5
Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exterior, AC, in thickness
indicated in the drawings or, if not indicated, not less than 3/4-inch nominal thickness.
FASTENERS
A.
General: Where carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative
treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners of type 304 stainless steel
B.
Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.
C.
Screws for Fastening to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C 954, except with wafer heads
and reamer wings, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened.
061053-2
061053
2.6
A.
Flexible Flashing: Self-adhesive, rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density,
polyethylene film to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.025 inch.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit
carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate nailers,
blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other
construction.
B.
Where wood-preservative-treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install
continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking.
C.
Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction,"
unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Do not splice structural members between supports, unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated
lumber.
F.
Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying
with the following:
1.
2.
3.2
NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners.
Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code.
PROTECTION
A.
Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite
protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment.
Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.
061053-3
061600
SHEATHING
SECTION 061600 - SHEATHING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.
2.
1.2
Roof sheathing.
Wall sheathing.
RELATED SECTIONS:
1.
1.3
Division 07 “Insulation” for interior vapor retarders
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Ally plywood to be certified to contain no Urea Formaldehyde.
1.
1.4
Plywood. OSB, chipboard, or particleboard is not permitted anywhere in project.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Stack plywood or other panels flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation.
Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
WOOD PANEL PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A.
2.2
Plywood: DOC PS 1.
WALL SHEATHING
A.
Exterior Grade Plywood
1.
B.
Type and Thickness: As indicated in the drawings
Fiberglass Matt Faced Gypsum Wall Sheathing: ASTM D 3273 & ASTM E 330 gypsum sheathing;
with water-resistant-treated core.
1.
Type and Thickness: Type X, size as indicated in the drawings.
061600-1
061600
2.3
SHEATHING
ROOF SHEATHING
A.
2.4
Plywood Roof Sheathing: Exterior sheathing.
FASTENERS
A.
General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated.
1.
2.5
For roof sheathing panels, provide fasteners with corrosion-protective coating having a
salt-spray resistance of more than 800 hours according to ASTM B 117.
WEATHER-RESISTANT SHEATHING PAPER
A.
Building Paper: ASTM D 226, Type 1 (No. 15 asphalt-saturated organic felt), un-perforated.
B.
Building Wrap: ASTM E 1677, Type I air retarder; with flame-spread and smoke-developed
indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, when tested according to ASTM E 84; UV
stabilized; and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the work include, but are not limited to the following:
a.
b.
2.
3.
C.
2.6
DuPont; Tyvek Commercial Wrap
Green guard: C500 High temperature building wrap
Water Vapor Permeance: Not less than 535g through 1 sq. m of surface in 24 hours per
ASTM E 96, Desiccant Method (Procedure A)
Allowable UV Exposure Time: Per Manufacturer’s recommendation
Building-Wrap Tape: Provide tape recommended by building-wrap manufacturer at all required
joints.
SHEATHING JOINT-AND-PENETRATION TREATMENT MATERIALS
A.
2.7
Sealant for Fiberglass Matt Faced Gypsum Sheathing Board: Elastomeric silicone joint sealant
recommended by sheathing manufacturer.
A.
Flexible Flashing: Provide self-adhesive, rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a highdensity, polyethylene film to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.025 inch .at all
exterior openings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated, complying with the following:
061600-2
061600
SHEATHING
1.
2.
B.
3.2
NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners.
Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's "International Building Code."
Coordinate sheathing installation with flashing and joint-sealant installation so these materials
are installed in sequence and manner that excludes exterior moisture.
WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL INSTALLATION
A.
General:
Comply with applicable recommendations
"APA Design/Construction Guide: Residential & Commercial."
1.
B.
APA
Form
No. E30K,
Comply with "Code Plus" installation provisions in guide referenced in paragraph above.
Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below:
1.
Roof Sheathing / Wall Sheathing:
a.
3.3
in
Screw to cold-formed metal framing.
GYPSUM SHEATHING INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with GA-253 and with manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
2.
3.
3.4
Fasten gypsum sheathing to cold-formed metal framing with screws.
Install boards with a 3/8-inch gap where non-load-bearing construction abuts structural
elements.
Install boards with a 1/4-inch gap where they abut masonry or similar materials.
WEATHER-RESISTANT SHEATHING-PAPER INSTALLATION
A.
General: Cover sheathing with weather-resistant sheathing paper as follows:
1.
2.
Cut back barrier 1/2 inch on each side of the break in supporting members at expansionor control-joint locations.
Apply barrier to cover vertical flashing with a minimum 4-inch overlap, unless otherwise
indicated.
B.
Building Paper: Apply horizontally with a 2-inch overlap and a 6-inch end lap; fasten to
sheathing with galvanized staples or roofing nails.
C.
Building Wrap: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
2.
3.5
Seal seams, edges, fasteners, and penetrations with tape.
Extend into jambs of openings and seal corners with tape.
SHEATHING JOINT-AND-PENETRATION TREATMENT
A.
Seal sheathing joints according to sheathing manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
Apply elastomeric sealant to joints and fasteners and trowel flat. Seal other penetrations
and openings.
061600-3
061600
3.6
SHEATHING
FLEXIBLE FLASHING INSTALLATION
A.
Apply flexible flashing at all exterior openings to provide a weather tight seal per manufacturers
written instructions.
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.7
Lap seams and junctures with other materials at least 4 inches, except that at flashing
flanges of other construction, laps need not exceed flange width.
Lap flashing over weather-resistant building paper at bottom and sides of openings.
Lap weather-resistant building paper over flashing at heads of openings.
After flashing has been applied, roll surfaces with a hard rubber or metal roller.
PROTECTION
A.
Paper-Surfaced Gypsum Sheathing: Protect sheathing by covering exposed exterior surface of
sheathing with weather-resistant sheathing paper securely fastened to framing. Apply covering
immediately after sheathing is installed.
061600-4
066400
PLASTIC PANELING
SECTION 066400 - PLASTIC PANELING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Section includes glass-fiber reinforced plastic (FRP) wall paneling and trim accessories.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Samples: For plastic paneling and trim accessories.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to
ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of
applicable testing agency.
1.
2.
Flame-Spread Index: 200 or less.
Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PLASTIC SHEET PANELING
A.
General: Gelcoat-finished, glass-fiber reinforced plastic panels complying with ASTM D 5319.
1.
2.
3.
2.2
Nominal Thickness: Not less than 0.09 inch.
Surface Finish: Pebbled
Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Trim Accessories: Manufacturer's standard one-piece vinyl extrusions designed to retain and
cover edges of panels. Provide division bars, inside corners, outside corners, and caps as
needed to conceal edges.
1.
B.
Adhesive: As recommended by plastic paneling manufacturer.
C.
Sealant: Single-component, mildew-resistant, neutral-curing silicone sealant recommended by
plastic paneling manufacturer and complying with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint
Sealants."
066400-1
066400
PLASTIC PANELING
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of adhesive, including oil, grease, dirt,
and dust.
B.
Condition panels by unpacking and placing in installation space before installation according to
manufacturer's written recommendations.
C.
Lay out paneling before installing. Locate panel joints to provide equal panels at ends of walls
not less than half the width of full panels.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Install plastic paneling according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Install panels in a full spread of adhesive.
C.
Install trim accessories with adhesive and nails or staples. Do not fasten through panels.
D.
Fill grooves in trim accessories with sealant before installing panels and bed inside corner trim
in a bead of sealant.
E.
Maintain uniform space between panels and wall fixtures. Fill space with sealant.
F.
Remove excess sealant and smears as paneling is installed. Clean with solvent recommended
by sealant manufacturer and then wipe with clean dry cloths until no residue remains.
066400-2
072100
THERMAL INSULATION
SECTION 072100 - THERMAL INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.
2.
3.
Perimeter exterior wall insulation on CIP concrete
Cavity-wall insulation.
Vapor retarders.
1.2
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Product test reports.
C.
Research/Evaluation Reports: For foam-plastic insulation.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire-testresponse characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84
for surface-burning characteristics and other methods indicated with product, by UL or another
testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials
with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products
specified.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
manufacturers specified.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
072100-1
072100
2.2
THERMAL INSULATION
FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD INSULATION
A.
Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, Type IV, 1.60 lb/cu. Ft.
1.
2.
2.3
Available Manufacturers.
1 inches thick with a minimum thermal resistance of 7.5 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu at 75
deg F. per adopted energy codes.
GLASS-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION
A.
Available Manufacturers.
B.
Faced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type III (non-reflective faced), Class A
(faced surface with a flame-spread index of 25 or less per ASTM E 84); Category 1 (membrane
is a vapor barrier), faced with foil-scrim-polyethylene.
C.
Where glass-fiber blanket insulation is indicated by the following thicknesses, provide blankets
in batt or roll form with thermal resistances indicated:
2.4
1.
5-1/2 inches thick with a thermal resistance of 19 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu at 75 deg F.
2.
3-5/8 inches thick with a thermal resistance of 13 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu at 75 deg F.
VAPOR RETARDERS:
A.
All fasteners penetrating waterproof barriers shall have waterproof gaskets, (cold applied
waterproofing building wrap)
B.
Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: ASTM D 4397, 6 mils (0.15 mm) thick, with a maximum
permeance rating of 0.13 perms
C.
Vapor-Retarder Tape:
Pressure sensitive tape of type recommend by vapor-retarder
manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder
D.
Vapor Retarder Fasteners: Pancake head, self tapping steel drill screws; with fender washers
E.
Single-Componenet Nonsag Urethane Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type I, Grade NS, Class 25,
Use NT related to exposure and use O related to vapor barrier substrates
F.
Adhesive for Vapor Retarders: Product recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer and has
demonstrated capability to bond vapor retarders securely to substrates indicated
2.5
AUXILIARY INSULATING MATERIALS
A.
2.6
Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation
securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation and substrates.
INSULATION FASTENERS
A.
Anchor Adhesive: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation anchors securely to
substrates indicated without damaging insulation, fasteners, and substrates.
072100-2
072100
THERMAL INSULATION
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and application
indicated.
B.
Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed at any
time to ice, rain, and snow.
C.
Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly
around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with
placement.
D.
Water-Piping Coordination: If water piping is located within insulated exterior walls, coordinate
location of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation and insulation
encapsulates piping.
E.
For preformed insulating units, provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from
manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units
to produce thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make
up total thickness.
3.2
INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION
A.
Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written
instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use
mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units.
B.
Seal joints between foam-plastic insulation units by applying adhesive, mastic, or sealant to
edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in completed
installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant as recommended by insulation manufacturer.
3.3
INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS
A.
Set vapor-retarder-faced units with vapor retarder to warm-in-winter side of construction, unless
otherwise indicated. Extend vapor barrier retarders to extremities of areas to protect from vapor
transmission. Secure vapor retarders in place with adhesives or other anchorage system as
indicated. Extend vapor retarders to cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates,
including those filled with loose-fiber insulation
B.
Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping no fewer than two studs.
1.
2.
Before installing vapor retarders, apply urethane sealant to flanges of metal framing
including runner tracks, metal studs, and framing around door and window openings.
Seal overlapping joints in vapor retarders with vapor retarder tape according to the vapor
retarder manufacturer’s written instructions. Seal butt joints with vapor retarder tape.
Locate all joints over framing members or other solid substrates
Firmly attach vapor retarders to metal framing and solid substrates with vapor retarder
fasteners as recommended by vapor retarder manufacturer
072100-3
072100
THERMAL INSULATION
3.
4.
C.
Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating
vapor retarders with vapor retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating
objects and vapor retarders
Tape joints and ruptures in vapor retarder, and seal each continuous area of insulation to
surrounding construction to ensure airtight installation.
Install board insulation on concrete substrates by adhesively attached, spindle-type insulation
anchors as follows:
1.
2.
Fasten insulation anchors to concrete substrates with insulation anchor adhesive
according to anchor manufacturer's written instructions. Space anchors according to
insulation manufacturer's written instructions for insulation type, thickness, and
application indicated.
After adhesive has dried, install board insulation by pressing insulation into position over
spindles and securing it tightly in place with insulation-retaining washers, taking care not
to compress insulation below indicated thickness.
072100-4
072600
UNDER-SLAB VAPOR BARRIER
SECTION 072600 - UNDER-SLAB VAPOR BARRIER
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Products supplied under this section:
1.
Vapor barrier, seam tape, and mastic for installation under concrete slabs.
B.
Related sections:
1.
Section 03 30 00 Cast-in-Place Concrete
1.2 REFERENCES
A.
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1.
ASTM E 1745-09 Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used
in Contact with Soil or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs.
2.
ASTM E 154-99 (2005) Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Retarders Used
in Contact with Earth Under Concrete Slabs, on Walls, or as Ground Cover.
3.
ASTM E 96-05 Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.
4.
ASTM F 1249-06 Standard Test Method for Water Vapor Transmission Rate
Through Plastic Film and Sheeting Using a Modulated Infrared Sensor.
5.
ASTM E 1643-09 Selection, Design, Installation, and Inspection of Water Vapor
Retarders Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs.
B.
American Concrete Institute (ACI):
1. ACI 302.2R-06 Guide for Concrete Slabs that Receive Moisture-Sensitive Flooring
Materials.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A.
Quality control/assurance:
1.
Summary of test results as per paragraph 8.3 of ASTM E 1745.
2.
Manufacturer’s samples, literature.
3.
Manufacturer’s installation instructions for placement, seaming and penetration
repair instructions.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Vapor barrier must have all of the following qualities:
2
1. Permeance of less than 0.01 Perms [grains/(ft · hr · inHg)] as tested in accordance
with ASTM E 1745 Section 7.
2. Other performance criteria:
a. Strength: ASTM E 1745 Class A.
b. Thickness: 15 mils minimum
B.
Vapor barrier products:
1. Basis of Design: Stego Wrap Vapor Barrier (15-mil) by Stego Industries LLC, (877)
464-7834 www.stegoindustries.com.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A.
Seam tape:
1. Stego Tape by Stego Industries LLC, (877) 464-7834 www.stegoindustries.com.
B.
Vapor-proofing mastic:
1. Stego Mastic by Stego Industries LLC, (877) 464-7834 www.stegoindustries.com.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A.
Ensure that base material is approved by Architect or Geotechnical Engineer.
1.
Level and compact base material.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A.
Install vapor barrier in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and ACI 302. Proper
measures should be taken to prevent curling of the slab as recommended by ACI..
1. Unroll vapor barrier with the longest dimension parallel with the direction of
the concrete placement.
072600-1
072600
UNDER-SLAB VAPOR BARRIER
2. Lap vapor barrier over footings and/or seal to foundation walls.
3. Overlap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer’s tape.
4. Seal all penetrations (including pipes) per manufacturer’s instructions.
5.
No penetration of the vapor barrier is allowed except for reinforcing steel and
permanent utilities.
6.
Repair damaged areas by cutting patches of vapor barrier, overlapping damaged
area 6 inches and taping all sides with tape.
072600-2
07 27 26
SPRAYER OR ROLLER APPLIED WATER RESISTIVE MEMBRANE & AIR BARRIER
CSI SECTION 07 27 26 – Sprayer or Roller Applied Water Resistive Membrane & Air Barrier
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Manufacturer’s requirements for the proper design, use, and installation of the Installation of liquid
applied water restive barriers.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete
B.
Section 04 20 00 - Unit Masonry
C.
Section 06 16 00 - Sheathing
D.
Section 07 62 00 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim
E.
Section 07 90 00 - Joint Protection
F.
Section 08 50 00 - Windows
G.
Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies
1.3 REFERENCES
A.
ASTM B117 - Test Method for Salt Spray (Fog) Testing
B.
ASTM C1135 - Test Method for Determining Tensile Adhesion Properties of Structural Sealants
C.
ASTM D522 - Standard Test Methods for Mandrel Bend Test of Attached Organic Coatings
D.
ASTM D2247 - Practice for Testing Water Resistance of Coatings in 100 Percent Relative Humidity
E.
ASTM D4541 - Test Method for Pull-Off Strength of Coatings Using Portable Adhesion Testers
F.
ASTM E72 - Test Methods of Conducting Strength Tests of Panels for Building Construction
G.
ASTM E84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
H.
ASTM E96 - Test Method for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials
I.
ASTM E283 - Standard Test Method for Determining Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows,
Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen
J.
ASTM E331 - Test Method for Water Penetration by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference
K.
ASTM E695 - Method for Measuring Relative Resistance to Impact Loading
L.
ASTM E2134 - Standard Test Method for Evaluating the Tensile-Adhesion Performance of an Exterior
Insulation and Finish System (EIFS)
M.
ASTM E2178 - Standard Test Method for Air Permeance of Building Materials
N.
ASTM E2485 - Standard Test Method for Freeze/Thaw Resistance of Exterior Insulation and Finish
Systems (EIFS) and Water Resistive Barrier Coatings
O.
ASTM G155 and G153 - Accelerated Weathering for Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials
1.4 Description Spray & Roller applied barriers
A.
100% acrylic based water-proof membrane and air barrier. Designed for use as water resistive barrier
and air barrier behind EIFS, Stucco and other claddings. This product is installed over glass mat
gypsum sheathing, cement board sheathing, CDX plywood, concrete or CMU.
B.
Functional Criteria:
1.
General:
07 27 26-1
07 27 26
a. Flashing: Flashing shall be continuous and watertight. Flashing shall be designed and
installed to prevent water infiltration behind the EIFS. Refer to Division 07 Flashing Section
for specified flashing materials.
b. The configuration of the water resistive barrier, drainage plane and flashing, must allow for
the egress of incidental moisture.
2.
Performance Requirements
a. System to meet the performance and testing requirements of the International Code Council
Acceptance Criteria AC 212 and ASTM E2570.
Parex USA
Weatherseal
Method
Accelerated
Weathering
AC 212
Air Infiltration
ASTM E2178
Air Leakage
Freeze-Thaw
Resistance
ASTM E283
ICC and ASTM E2570
Criteria
25 Cycles followed by
Hydrostatic Pressure Test: No
water penetration on the plane
of the exterior facing side of
the substrate.
Calculated flow Rate at 75 Pa
2
(1.57 lb/ft , 0.3 in H2O) =
2
2
< 0.02 L/m *s (< 0.004 cfm/ft )
No Criteria
ASTM E 2485
10 Cycles
Hydrostatic
Pressure Test
AATCC 127
(Water Column)
Elongation
Flexibility
Nail Seal ability,
Head of Water
ASTM D412
ASTM D522
Resist 21.6 in (55 cm) water
for 5 hours before and after
aging
No Criteria
No Criteria
ASTM D1970
No Criteria
Racking
ASTM E72
Deflection at 1/8 in (3.2 mm)
Restrained
Environmental
Structural
Loading
ICC ES AC 212
/ ASTM E2570
ASTM E1233
Procedure A
Surface Burning
Characteristics
ASTM E84
ICC and ASTM E2568
Flame Spread <25
Smoke Developed <450
Flame Spread =0
Smoke Developed =0
ASTM E 2134/
ASTM C 297
Minimum 15 psi (104 kPa)
Pass all listed substrates and
flashing materials
ASTM D 2247
14 Days
Pass – No Deleterious Effects.
2.86 psf (137 Pa) for 15
minutes
Tested after Structural
Loading, Racking and
Restrained Environmental
Cycling at 2.86 psf (137 Pa) for
15 minutes
Pass 25.4 psf (1216 Pa) for 165
minutes
Vapor Permeable
7 perms
Tensile Bond
Strength
Water
Resistance
Water
Penetration
ASTM E331
Water
Penetration
ASTM E331
Water vapor
transmission
ASTM E96
Procedure B
Weathering
ICC ES AC 212
/ ASTM E2570
Wind Driven Rain
F.S. TT-C-555B
VOC
EPA
Reference
Test Method
24
Regional
Harvest
1.5 SUBMITTALS
5 Cycles of wetting and drying
10 Cycles @ 80% design load
210 hours of UV Exposure, 25
cycles of accelerated
weatherin, 21.6 in (549 mm)
water column for 5 hours
No Criteria
Results
Pass: no water penetration
2
2
< .00001 L/m *s (0.00001 cfm/ft )
2
at 75 Pa (1.57 lb/ft , 0.3 in H2O)
< 0.004 cfm/ft
2
Pass – No Deleterious Effects
Pass: no water penetration
360%
No Cracking at 1/8” (3 mm)
Pass 5 inches of water
Pass -No cracking at field, joints
or flashing connection
No Water Penetration
Pass
Pass
US EPA, South Coast
AQMD and Greenseal
Standard
10 g/L
LEED MRc 5.1
100% at all facilities
07 27 26-2
07 27 26
A.
General: Submit Samples, Evaluation Reports and Certificates in accordance with Division 01 General
Requirements Submittal Section.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Qualifications:
1.
All materials shall be manufactured or sold by Water Resistive Barrier manufacturer or purchased
from manufacturer or its authorized distributor.
2.
Applicator:
a. Shall have attended a Educational Seminar.
b. Shall possess a current certificate of education.
c.
Shall be experienced and competent in installation of plaster-like materials.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver in original packaging with manufacturer's identification.
B.
Storage: Store materials in a cool, dry location, out of sunlight, protected from weather and other
harmful environment, and at a temperature above 40°F (4°C) and below 110°F (43°C) in accordance
with manufacturer's instructions.
1.8 PROJECT / SITE CONDITIONS
A.
Installation Ambient Air Temperature: Minimum of 40 °F (4 °C) and rising, and remain so for 24 hours
thereafter.
B.
Substrate Temperature: Do not materials to substrates whose temperature are below 40 °F (4 °C) or
contain frost or ice.
C.
Inclement Weather: Do not apply materials during inclement weather, unless appropriate protection is
employed.
D.
Materials shall not be applied if ambient temperature exceeds 120ºF (49ºC) or falls below 40 °F (4 °C)
within 24 hours of application. Protect base coat from uneven and excessive evaporation during hot,
dry weather.
E.
Prior to installation, the wall shall be inspected for surface contamination, or other defects that may
adversely affect the performance of the materials and shall be free of residual moisture.
1.9 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING:
A.
1.10
Coordination installation with other construction operations.
WARRANTY
A.
Warranty: Upon request, at completion of installation, provide Standard Limited Warranty.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Basis of Design Manufacturer: Parex USA, Inc., 4125 E. La Palma Ave., Suite 250, Anaheim, CA
92807 Contact Andy Townes at 505-338-443 or [email protected]
B.
Components: Obtain components from authorized distributors. No substitutions or additions of other
materials are permitted without prior written permission from specified material manufacturer for this
project.
2.2 MATERIALS
07 27 26-3
07 27 26
A.
2.3
Water-Resistive Barrier Coating:
1.
Parex USA Weatherseal Spray & Roll-On: A non-cementitious, 100% acrylic trowelable
air/weather barrier.
2.
Parex 396 Sheathing Tape: Non-woven synthetic fiber tape to reinforce Weatherseal Spray &
Roll-On at sheathing board joints, into rough openings and other terminations into dissimilar
materials available in 4 in, 6 in and 9 in.
3.
Flashing Membrane: Self sealing, Polyester faced, rubberized asphalt membrane, 30 mils (0.76
mm) thick.
RELATED MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES
A.
B.
Substrate Materials:
1.
Glass mat gypsum sheathing conforming to ASTM C1177.
2.
Cement Fiber Sheathing conforming to ASTM C1186
3.
Gypsum Sheathing: Minimum 1/2" (13 mm) thick, core-treated, weather-resistant, exterior
gypsum sheathing complying with ASTM C79.
4.
Plywood: Minimum 7/16" (8 mm) thick exterior grade or PS 1, Exposure 1, minimum 7/16" thick,
C veneer facing out, panels gapped 1/8 " at all edges.
5.
Concrete Masonry Units (CMU): Non-painted (uncoated).
6.
Concrete (poured or pre-cast).
7.
Other Approved by Parex USA in writing prior to the project.
Flashing: Refer to Division 07 Flashing Section for flashing materials.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify project site conditions under provisions of Section 01 00 00.
B.
Compliance: Comply with manufacturer's instructions for installation.
C.
Substrate Examination: Examine prior to liquid applied installation as follows:
1.
Substrate shall be of a type approved by manufacturer. Plywood and OSB substrates shall be
gapped 1/8 in (3.2 mm) at all edges. Plywood and OSB substrates cut edges (non-factory edges)
must be sealed with liquid water-resistive coating and sheathing tape.
2.
Substrate shall be examined for soundness, and other harmful conditions.
3.
Substrate shall be free of dust, dirt, laitance, efflorescence, and other harmful contaminants.
4.
Substrate construction in accordance with substrate material manufacturer's specifications and
applicable building codes.
5.
Maximum deflection of the substrate shall be determine by the requirements of the exterior
cladding.
D.
Flashing: Flashing should be installed prior to the barrier application and incorporated with the
flashing to create positive drainage.
E.
Advise Contractor of discrepancies preventing installation of the barrier. Do not proceed with the work
until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A.
Protection: Protect surrounding material surfaces and areas during installation of system.
B.
Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.
C.
Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result
07 27 26-4
07 27 26
for the substrate under the project conditions.
3.3 MIXING
A.
3.4
Mix products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
APPLICATION
A.
General: Installation shall conform to this specification written instructions.
1.
Flash all rough openings with liquid membrane and embed with sheathing tape or polyester
backed peel and stick flashing membrane.
2.
Treat all sheathing joints with liquid water-resistive barrier sheathing tape.
3.
Apply liquid water-resistive barrier to the surface of the substrate (Minimum 2 coats on plywood,
concrete and masonry).
4.
Ensure that the liquid barrier laps onto all tracks and flashing to allow for any water to be drained
into the tracks/flashing.
3.5 CLEAN-UP
A.
Removal: Remove and legally dispose of component debris material from job site.
B.
Clean surfaces and work area of foreign materials resulting from installations.
3.6 PROTECTION
A.
Provide protection of installed materials from water infiltration into or behind them.
B.
Provide protection of installed stucco from dust, dirt, precipitation, and freezing during installation.
C.
Provide protection of installed finish from dust, dirt, precipitation, freezing and continuous high humidity
until fully cured and dry.
D.
Clean exposed surfaces using materials and methods recommended by the manufacturer of the
material or product being cleaned. Remove and replace work that cannot be cleaned to the
satisfaction of the Project Designer/Owner.
END OF SECTION 07 27 26 – Sprayer or Roller Applied Waterproof Membrane & Air Barrier
07 27 26-5
075423
SECTION 075423 - THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.3
Adhered TPO membrane roofing system.
Division 05 Section "Steel Decking" for furnishing acoustical deck rib insulation.
Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for metal roof penetration flashings,
flashings, and counter flashings.
Roof expansion-joint assemblies.
Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for joint sealants, joint fillers, and joint preparation.
Division 22 Section "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties" for roof drains.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
Roofing Terminology: See ASTM D 1079 and glossary of NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and
Waterproofing Manual" for definitions of terms related to roofing work in this Section.
A.
General Performance: Installed membrane roofing and base flashings shall withstand specified
uplift pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to
defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Membrane
roofing and base flashings shall remain watertight.
B.
Material Compatibility: Provide roofing materials that are compatible with one another under
conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by membrane roofing
manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
C.
Roofing System Design: Provide membrane roofing system that is identical to systems that
have been successfully tested by a qualified testing and inspecting agency to resist uplift
pressure calculated according to ASCE/SEI 7.
1.
2.
3.
Corner Uplift Pressure: FM 1-75.
Perimeter Uplift Pressure: FM 1-75.
Field-of-Roof Uplift Pressure: FM 1-75.
075423-1
075423
D.
FM Approvals Listing: Provide membrane roofing, base flashings, and component materials
that comply with requirements in FM Approvals 4450 and FM Approvals 4470 as part of a
membrane roofing system, and that are listed in FM Approvals' "RoofNav" for Class 1 or
noncombustible construction, as applicable. Identify materials with FM Approvals' markings.
1.
2.
1.5
Fire/Windstorm Classification: Class 1A-90.
Hail Resistance: SH.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Shop Drawings: For roofing system.
attachments to other work.
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and
Base flashings and membrane terminations.
Composite insulating roof system, including slopes.
Roof plan showing orientation of steel roof deck and orientation of membrane roofing and
fastening spacing’s and patterns for mechanically fastened membrane roofing.
Insulation fastening patterns for corner, perimeter, and field-of-roof locations.
Samples for Verification: For the following products, in manufacturer's standard sizes:
1.
2.
3.
Sheet roofing, of color specified, including T-shaped side and end lap seam.
Walkway pads or rolls.
Termination bars.
D.
Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and manufacturer.
E.
Manufacturer Certificate: Signed by roofing manufacturer certifying that membrane roofing
system complies with requirements specified in "Performance Requirements" Article.
1.
Submit evidence of complying with performance requirements.
F.
Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer
and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for components of membrane roofing system.
G.
Field quality-control reports.
H.
Maintenance Data: For membrane roofing system to include in maintenance manuals.
I.
Warranties: Sample of special warranties.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by membrane
roofing system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product.
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain components including roof insulation and fasteners for membrane
roofing system from same manufacturer as membrane roofing.
C.
Roof Covering Assembly: Assembly with foam plastic insulation shall satisfactorily pass FM
4450, UL 1256, or FM-160 whichever is more stringent.
075423-2
075423
1.7
A.
Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled
with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, approval or
listing agency markings, and directions for storing and mixing with other components.
B.
Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location
and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer. Protect stored
liquid material from direct sunlight.
1.
Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stated shelf
life.
C.
Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight,
moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation
manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.
D.
Handle and store roofing materials and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent
deflection of deck.
1.8
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.9
Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions
and warranty requirements.
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard or customized form, without monetary limitation, in
which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of membrane roofing system that
fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1.
B.
Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
Special Project Warranty: Submit roofing Installer's warranty, on warranty form at end of this
Section, signed by Installer, covering Work of this Section, including all components of
membrane roofing system such as membrane roofing, base flashing, roof insulation, fasteners,
cover boards, substrate boards, vapor retarders, roof pavers, and walkway products, for the
following warranty period:
1.
Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
TPO MEMBRANE ROOFING
A.
Fabric-Reinforced Thermoplastic Polyolefin Sheet:
reinforced, uniform, flexible TPO sheet.
1.
ASTM D 6878, internally fabric or scrim
following:
075423-3
075423
a.
b.
2.
3.
2.2
Carlisle SynTec Incorporated.
Firestone Building Products Company.
Thickness: 60 mils, nominal.
Color: White
AUXILIARY MEMBRANE ROOFING MATERIALS
A.
General: Auxiliary membrane roofing materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer
for intended use, and compatible with membrane roofing.
1.
Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having
jurisdiction.
B.
Sheet Flashing: Manufacturer's standard unreinforced thermoplastic polyolefin sheet flashing,
55 mils thick, minimum, of same color as sheet membrane.
C.
Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard.
D.
Slip Sheet: Manufacturer's standard, of thickness required for application.
E.
Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard, predrilled stainless-steel or aluminum bars,
approximately 1 by 1/8 inch thick; with anchors.
F.
Metal Battens: Manufacturer's standard, aluminum-zinc-alloy-coated or zinc-coated steel sheet,
approximately 1 inch wide by 0.05 inch thick, pre-punched.
G.
Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosionresistance provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening membrane to substrate,
and acceptable to membrane roofing system manufacturer.
H.
Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet
flashings, preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, T-joint covers, lap sealants,
termination reglets, and other accessories.
2.3
ROOF INSULATION
A.
General: Provide preformed roof insulation boards that comply with requirements and
referenced standards, selected from manufacturer's standard sizes and of thicknesses
indicated.
B.
Tapered Insulation: Provide factory-tapered insulation boards fabricated to slope of 1/4 inch per
12 inches unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes where
indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated.
D.
Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type II, Class 1, Grade II. with a polymer or
cellulosic glass-fiber mat facer on both major surfaces.
1.
Available Manufacturers:
a.
By roofing manufacturer for warranty to be valid
075423-4
075423
E.
Maximum board size 4’X8’ for loose laid and mechanically attached insulation boards
F.
Expanded polystyrene is an acceptable alternative if roofing warranty is still met.
2.4
INSULATION ACCESSORIES
A.
Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosionresistance provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation and cover
boards to substrate, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.
B.
Insulation Adhesive: Insulation manufacturer's recommended cold-applied adhesive formulated
to attach roof insulation to substrate or to another insulation layer.
C.
Cover Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum substrate, as
indicated on the drawings (1/2 inch thick minimum).
2.5
WALKWAYS
A.
Flexible Walkways: Factory-formed, nonporous, heavy-duty, slip-resisting, surface-textured
walkway pads or rolls, approximately 3/16 inch thick, and acceptable to membrane roofing
system manufacturer.
B.
Layout: As indicated on the drawings
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSULATION INSTALLATION
A.
Coordinate installing membrane roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to
precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday.
B.
Comply with membrane roofing system and insulation manufacturer's written instructions for
installing roof insulation.
C.
Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated.
D.
Install insulation under area of roofing to achieve required thickness. Where overall insulation
thickness is 2.7 inches or greater, install two or more layers with joints of each succeeding layer
staggered from joints of previous layer a minimum of 6 inches in each direction.
E.
Mechanically Fastened and Adhered Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and secure first
layer of insulation to deck using mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for
fastening specified board-type roof insulation to deck type.
1.
2.
3.
Fasten first layer of insulation to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of
roof.
Set each subsequent layer of insulation in a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt, applied
within plus or minus 25 deg F of equiviscous temperature.
Set each subsequent layer of insulation in adhesive, firmly pressing and maintaining
insulation in place.
075423-5
075423
F.
Install cover boards over insulation with long joints in continuous straight lines with end joints
staggered between rows. Offset joints of insulation below a minimum of 6 inches in each
direction. Loosely butt cover boards together and adhere to insulation.
1.
3.2
Adhere cover boards to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of roof.
ADHERED MEMBRANE ROOFING INSTALLATION
A.
Adhere membrane roofing over area to receive roofing and install according to membrane
roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Accurately align membrane roofing and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum
dimensions required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps.
C.
Bonding Adhesive: Apply to substrate and underside of membrane roofing at rate required by
manufacturer and allow to partially dry before installing membrane roofing. Do not apply to
splice area of membrane roofing.
D.
In addition to adhering, mechanically fasten membrane roofing securely at terminations,
penetrations, and perimeter of roofing.
E.
Apply membrane roofing with side laps shingled with slope of roof deck where possible.
F.
Seams: Clean seam areas, overlap membrane roofing, and hot-air weld side and end laps of
membrane roofing and sheet flashings according to manufacturer's written instructions to
ensure a watertight seam installation.
1.
2.
3.
3.3
Test lap edges with probe to verify seam weld continuity. Apply lap sealant to seal cut
edges of sheet membrane.
Verify field strength of seams a minimum of twice daily and repair seam sample areas.
Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofing that does not comply with requirements.
BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION
A.
Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories and adhere to substrates according
to membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate and allow
to partially dry. Do not apply to seam area of flashing.
C.
Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with cured or uncured sheet
flashing.
D.
Clean seam areas, overlap, and firmly roll sheet flashings into the adhesive. Hot-air weld side
and end laps to ensure a watertight seam installation.
E.
Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings and mechanically anchor to substrate through
termination bars.
075423-6
075423
3.4
WALKWAY INSTALLATION
A.
3.5
Flexible Walkways: Install walkway products in locations indicated. Heat weld to substrate or
adhere walkway products to substrate with compatible adhesive according to roofing system
manufacturer's written instructions.
A.
Testing Agency:
inspections.
B.
Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect
roofing installation on completion.
C.
Repair or remove and replace components of membrane roofing system where inspections
indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.
D.
Additional inspections, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of
replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
3.6
Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform
PROTECTING AND CLEANING
A.
Protect membrane roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction
period. When remaining construction will not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for
deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to
Architect and Owner.
B.
Correct deficiencies in or remove membrane roofing system that does not comply with
requirements, repair substrates and repair or reinstall membrane roofing system to a condition
free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty
requirements.
C.
Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures
recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.
3.7
ROOFING INSTALLER'S WARRANTY
A.
WHEREAS Insert name of Insert address, herein called the "Roofing Installer," has performed
roofing and associated work ("work") on the following project:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.
Owner: Insert name of Owner.
Address: Insert address.
Building Name/Type: Insert information.
Address: Insert address.
Area of Work: Insert information.
Acceptance Date: Insert date.
Warranty Period: Insert time.
Expiration Date: Insert date.
AND WHEREAS Roofing Installer has contracted (either directly with Owner or indirectly as a
subcontractor) to warrant said work against leaks and faulty or defective materials and
workmanship for designated Warranty Period,
075423-7
075423
C.
NOW THEREFORE Roofing Installer hereby warrants, subject to terms and conditions herein
set forth, that during Warranty Period he will, at his own cost and expense, make or cause to be
made such repairs to or replacements of said work as are necessary to correct faulty and
defective work and as are necessary to maintain said work in a watertight condition.
D.
This Warranty is made subject to the following terms and conditions:
1.
Specifically excluded from this Warranty are damages to work and other parts of the
building, and to building contents, caused by:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
E.
Lightning;
Peak gust wind speed exceeding Insert wind speed mph;
Fire
Failure of roofing system substrate, including cracking, settlement, excessive
deflection, deterioration, and decomposition;
Faulty construction of parapet walls, copings, chimneys, skylights, vents,
equipment supports, and other edge conditions and penetrations of the work;
Vapor condensation on bottom of roofing; and
Activity on roofing by others, including construction contractors, maintenance
personnel, other persons, and animals, whether authorized or unauthorized by
Owner.
When work has been damaged by any of foregoing causes, Warranty shall be null and
void until such damage has been repaired by Roofing Installer and until cost and expense
thereof have been paid by Owner or by another responsible party so designated.
Roofing Installer is responsible for damage to work covered by this Warranty but is not
liable for consequential damages to building or building contents resulting from leaks or
faults or defects of work.
During Warranty Period, if Owner allows alteration of work by anyone other than Roofing
Installer, including cutting, patching, and maintenance in connection with penetrations,
attachment of other work, and positioning of anything on roof, this Warranty shall become
null and void on date of said alterations, but only to the extent said alterations affect work
covered by this Warranty. If Owner engages Roofing Installer to perform said alterations,
Warranty shall not become null and void unless Roofing Installer, before starting said
work, shall have notified Owner in writing, showing reasonable cause for claim, that said
alterations would likely damage or deteriorate work, thereby reasonably justifying a
limitation or termination of this Warranty.
During Warranty Period, if original use of roof is changed and it becomes used for, but
was not originally specified for, a promenade, work deck, spray-cooled surface, flooded
basin, or other use or service more severe than originally specified, this Warranty shall
become null and void on date of said change, but only to the extent said change affects
work covered by this Warranty.
Owner shall promptly notify Roofing Installer of observed, known, or suspected leaks,
defects, or deterioration and shall afford reasonable opportunity for Roofing Installer to
inspect work and to examine evidence of such leaks, defects, or deterioration.
This Warranty is recognized to be the only warranty of Roofing Installer on said work and
shall not operate to restrict or cut off Owner from other remedies and resources lawfully
available to Owner in cases of roofing failure. Specifically, this Warranty shall not
operate to relieve Roofing Installer of responsibility for performance of original work
according to requirements of the Contract Documents, regardless of whether Contract
was a contract directly with Owner or a subcontract with Owner's General Contractor.
IN WITNESS THEREOF, this instrument has been duly executed this Insert day day of Insert
month, Insert year.
1.
Authorized Signature: Insert signature.
075423-8
075423
2.
3.
Name: Insert name.
Title: Insert title.
075423-9
077100
ROOF SPECIALTIES
SECTION 077100 - ROOF SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
1.2
Copings.
Roof-edge drainage systems.
Reglets and counterflashings.
A.
SPRI Wind Design Standard: Manufacture and install copings tested according to SPRI ES-1
and capable of resisting the following design pressures:
1.
1.3
Design Pressure: As required per local code jurisdiction.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Shop Drawings: For roof specialties. Include plans, elevations, expansion-joint locations,
keyed details, and attachments to other work. Distinguish between plant- and field-assembled
work.
C.
Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.
D.
E.
Maintenance data.
F.
Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.5
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty on Painted Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer
agrees to repair finish or replace roof specialties that show evidence of deterioration of factoryapplied finishes within 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
077100-1
077100
ROOF SPECIALTIES
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
EXPOSED METALS
A.
Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, alloy as standard with manufacturer for finish required, with
temper to suit forming operations and performance required.
1.
2.
Surface: Smooth, flat finish.
Exposed Coil-Coated Finishes: Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal
surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.
a.
B.
Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation.
1.
2.
Surface: Smooth, flat finish.
Exposed Coil-Coated Finishes: Prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with
ASTM A 755/A 755M. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to
comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.
a.
2.2
Two-Coat Fluoropolymer:
AAMA 620.
System consisting of primer and
fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by
weight.
Two-Coat Fluoropolymer:
AAMA 621.
System consisting of primer and
fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by
weight.
CONCEALED METALS
A.
Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of
use and structural performance indicated, mill finished.
B.
Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type
of use and structural performance indicated, mill finished.
C.
Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation.
2.3
UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS
A.
Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: Minimum 30 to 40 mils thick, consisting of slipresisting polyethylene-film top surface laminated to layer of butyl or SBS-modified asphalt
adhesive, with release-paper backing; cold applied. Provide primer when recommended by
underlayment manufacturer.
1.
2.
2.4
Thermal Stability: ASTM D 1970; stable after testing at 240 deg F.
Low-Temperature Flexibility: ASTM D 1970; passes after testing at minus 20 deg F.
A.
General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, protective coatings, sealants, and other
miscellaneous items required by manufacturer for a complete installation.
077100-2
077100
B.
ROOF SPECIALTIES
Fasteners: Manufacturer's recommended fasteners, suitable for application and designed to
meet performance requirements. Furnish the following unless otherwise indicated:
1.
2.
3.
Exposed Penetrating Fasteners: Gasketed screws with hex washer heads matching
color of sheet metal.
Fasteners for Aluminum: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel.
Fasteners for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel or hotdip zinc-coated steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329.
C.
Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polymer sealant of type, grade, class, and use
classifications required by roofing-specialty manufacturer for each application.
D.
Butyl Sealant:
ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant;
polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited
movement.
E.
Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
F.
Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for application.
2.5
COPINGS / FASCIA
A.
Copings: Manufactured coping system consisting of formed-metal coping cap in section lengths
not exceeding 12 feet, concealed anchorage; corner units, end cap units, and concealed splice
plates with same finish as coping caps.
1.
Coping-Cap / Fascia Material:
performance requirements.
a.
b.
c.
2.
6.
2.6
Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer.
Size: Coping 22 ga, Fascia 20 ga
Coping-Cap / Fascia Material: Zinc-coated steel, nominal thickness as required to meet
performance requirements.
a.
b.
c.
3.
4.
5.
Formed aluminum, thickness as required to meet
Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer.
Size: Coping 22 ga, Fascia 20 ga
Corners: Factory mitered and mechanically clinched and sealed watertight.
Coping-Cap Attachment Method: Snap-on, fabricated from coping-cap material.
Snap-on-Coping Anchor Plates: Concealed, galvanized-steel sheet, 12 inches wide, with
integral cleats.
Face Leg Cleats: Concealed, continuous galvanized-steel sheet.
ROOF-EDGE DRAINAGE SYSTEMS
A.
Downspouts: Plain rectangular complete with mitered elbows, manufactured from the following
exposed metal. Furnish with metal hangers, from same material as downspouts, and anchors.
1.
Formed Aluminum: 0.032 inch thick.
077100-3
077100
B.
ROOF SPECIALTIES
Aluminum Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer.
1.
2.7
Color: Match adjacent wall finish.
REGLETS AND COUNTERFLASHINGS
A.
Reglets: Manufactured units formed to provide secure interlocking of separate reglet and
counterflashing pieces, from the following exposed metal:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Counterflashings: Manufactured units of heights to overlap top edges of base flashings by 4
inches and in lengths not exceeding 12 feet designed to snap into reglets and compress against
base flashings with joints lapped, from the following exposed metal:
1.
2.
C.
2.
Flexible-Flashing Retainer: Provide resilient plastic or rubber accessory to secure flexible
flashing in reglet where clearance does not permit use of standard metal counterflashing
or where reglet is provided separate from metal counterflashing.
Counterflashing Wind-Restraint Clips: Provide clips to be installed before counterflashing
to prevent wind uplift of counterflashing lower edge.
Aluminum Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer.
1.
E.
Formed Aluminum: .Coping 22 ga, Fascia 20 ga
Zinc-Coated Steel: Coping 22 ga, Fascia 20 ga
Accessories:
1.
D.
Formed Aluminum: .Coping 22 ga, Fascia 20 ga
Zinc-Coated Steel: Coping 22 ga, Fascia 20 ga
Corners: Factory mitered and mechanically clinched and sealed watertight.
Surface-Mounted Type: Provide reglets with slotted holes for fastening to substrate, with
neoprene or other suitable weatherproofing washers, and with channel for sealant at top
edge.
Color: Match adjacent wall/roof finish as noted in the drawings
Zinc-Coated Steel Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer.
1.
Color: Match adjacent wall/roof finish as noted in the drawings
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
General: Install roof specialties according to manufacturer's written instructions. Anchor roof
specialties securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use
fasteners, solder, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as
required to complete roof-specialty systems.
1.
2.
Install roof specialties level, plumb, true to line and elevation; with no oil-canning and
without warping, jogs in alignment, buckling, or tool marks.
Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder and sealant.
077100-4
077100
ROOF SPECIALTIES
3.
4.
5.
B.
Metal Protection: Protect metals against galvanic action by separating dissimilar metals from
contact with each other or with corrosive substrates by painting contact surfaces with
bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer.
1.
C.
Install roof specialties to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify
shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before manufacture.
Torch cutting of roof specialties is not permitted.
Install underlayment with adhesive for temporary anchorage. Apply in shingle fashion to
shed water, with lapped joints of not less than 2 inches. Roll laps of self-adhering sheet
underlayment with roller; cover within 14 days.
Underlayment: Where installing metal flashing directly on cementitious or wood
substrates, install a course of self-adhering, high-temperature sheet underlayment.
Expansion Provisions: Allow for thermal expansion of exposed roof specialties.
1.
2.
Space movement joints at a maximum of 12 feet with no joints within 18 inches of corners
or intersections unless otherwise shown on Drawings.
When ambient temperature at time of installation is between 40 and 70 deg F, set joint
members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting proportionately for
installation at higher ambient temperatures.
D.
Fastener Sizes: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate substrate not less than recommended
by fastener manufacturer to achieve maximum pull-out resistance.
E.
Seal joints with sealant as required by roofing-specialty manufacturer.
F.
Seal joints as required for watertight construction. Place sealant to be completely concealed in
joint. Do not install sealants at temperatures below 40 deg F.
3.2
COPING INSTALLATION
A.
Install cleats, anchor plates, and other anchoring and attachment accessories and devices with
concealed fasteners.
B.
Anchor copings to meet performance requirements.
1.
3.3
Interlock face and back leg drip edges of snap-on coping cap into cleated anchor plates
anchored to substrate at manufacturer's required spacing that meets performance
requirements.
ROOF-EDGE DRAINAGE-SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install components to produce a complete roof-edge drainage system according to
B.
Downspouts: Join sections with manufacturer's standard telescoping joints. Provide hangers
with fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely to walls and 1 inch away from walls;
locate fasteners at top and bottom and at approximately 60 inches o.c.
077100-5
077100
3.4
ROOF SPECIALTIES
REGLET AND COUNTERFLASHING INSTALLATION
A.
Surface-Mounted Reglets: Install reglets to receive flashings where flashing without embedded
reglets is indicated on Drawings. Install at height so that inserted counterflashings overlap 4
inches over top edge of base flashings.
B.
Counterflashings: Insert counterflashings into reglets or other indicated receivers; ensure that
counterflashings overlap 4 inches over top edge of base flashings. Lap counterflashing joints a
minimum of 4 inches and bed with sealant. Fit counterflashings tightly to base flashings.
3.5
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as roof specialties are installed.
077100-6
079200
JOINT SEALANTS
SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
1.2
Silicone joint sealants.
Urethane joint sealants.
Latex joint sealants.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.
B.
Warranties.
1.3
WARRANTY
A.
Special Installer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or
replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in
this Section within specified warranty period.
1.
B.
Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
Special Manufacturer's Warranty:
Manufacturer's standard form in which joint-sealant
manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with
performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.
1.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS, GENERAL
A.
VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Provide sealants and sealant primers for use inside the
weatherproofing system that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Part 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):
1.
2.
3.
B.
Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L.
Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L.
Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.
Liquid-Applied Joint Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for
each liquid-applied joint sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920
classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates.
079200-1
079200
JOINT SEALANTS
1.
Suitability for Immersion in Liquids. Where sealants are indicated for Use I for joints that
will be continuously immersed in liquids, provide products that have undergone testing
according to ASTM C 1247. Liquid used for testing sealants is deionized water, unless
C.
Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where sealants are specified to be nonstaining to porous
substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have
not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project.
D.
Suitability for Contact with Food: Where sealants are indicated for joints that will come in
repeated contact with food, provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600.
2.2
SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS
A.
Mildew-Resistant Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant : ASTM C 920.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.3
BASF Building Systems.
Dow Corning Corporation.
GE Advanced Materials - Silicones.
May National Associates, Inc.
Pecora Corporation.
Polymeric Systems, Inc.
Schnee-Morehead, Inc.
Sika Corporation; Construction Products Division.
Tremco Incorporated.
Type: Single component (S) or multicomponent (M).
Grade: nonsag (NS).
Class: 100/50 50 .
Uses Related to Exposure: Nontraffic (NT).
URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS
A.
Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920.
1.
the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
Bostik, Inc.
Lymtal, International, Inc.
Pacific Polymers International, Inc.
Pecora Corporation.
Polymeric Systems, Inc.
Sika Corporation; Construction Products Division.
079200-2
079200
JOINT SEALANTS
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.4
Type: multicomponent (M).
Grade: nonsag (NS).
Class: 50 .
Uses Related to Exposure: Traffic (T) Nontraffic (NT).
LATEX JOINT SEALANTS
A.
Latex Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF.
1.
the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.5
Bostik, Inc.
Pecora Corporation.
ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS
A.
Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant
complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through
perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative
assemblies according to ASTM E 90.
1.
the following:
a.
b.
2.6
Pecora Corporation.
USG Corporation.
JOINT SEALANT BACKING
A.
Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin)
Type O (open-cell material) Type B (bicellular material with a surface skin) or any of the
preceding types, as approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint application
indicated, and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing
optimum sealant performance.
B.
Bond-Breaker Tape:
manufacturer.
2.7
Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant
A.
Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of
sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate
tests and field tests.
079200-3
079200
JOINT SEALANTS
B.
Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants
and sealant backing materials.
C.
Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces
adjacent to joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to
comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
2.
Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do
not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint
sealants.
B.
Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as
indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to
comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of jointsealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.
C.
Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with
adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or
by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after
tooling without disturbing joint seal.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint
sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
B.
Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position
required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint
widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
1.
2.
3.
Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.
Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.
Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application
and replace them with dry materials.
C.
Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between
sealants and backs of joints.
D.
Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time
backings are installed:
1.
2.
3.
Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.
Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow
optimum sealant movement capability.
079200-4
079200
E.
JOINT SEALANTS
Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or
curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form
smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure
contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.
1.
2.
3.
Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.
Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not
discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.
Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated.
F.
Acoustical Sealant Installation:
recommendations.
G.
Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by
methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and
of products in which joints occur.
3.3
Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written
A.
Field-Adhesion Testing: Field test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows:
1.
Extent of Testing: Test completed and cured sealant joints as follows:
a.
b.
2.
B.
Perform 10 tests for the first 1000 feet of joint length for each kind of sealant and
joint substrate.
Perform 1 test for each 1000 feet of joint length thereafter or 1 test per each floor
per elevation.
Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint
Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in
ASTM C 1521.
Evaluation of Field-Adhesion Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from
testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory.
Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other
requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated
requirements.
079200-5
079500
EXPANSION CONTROL
SECTION 079500 - EXPANSION CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
This Section includes architectural joint systems for vertical plane walls on building exteriors.
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.3
Shop Drawings: Provide placement drawings, including line diagrams and details.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate installation of exterior wall joint systems with roof expansion assemblies specified in
Division 07.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Moisture Barrier: PVC , minimum 30 mils thick.
B.
Accessories: Manufacturer's standard anchors, fasteners, and other accessories as required
for complete installations.
2.2
ARCHITECTURAL JOINT SYSTEMS, GENERAL
A.
General: Provide joint systems of design indicated.
1.
2.
2.3
Furnish in longest practicable lengths to minimize splicing. Install with hairline mitered
corners where joint changes direction.
Include factory-fabricated closure materials and transition pieces to provide continuous
joint systems.
ARCHITECTURAL JOINT SYSTEMS FOR BUILDING EXTERIORS
A.
Architectural Joint Systems for Exterior Walls:
1.
2.
Basis-of-Design Product: COLORSEAL by EMSEAL for watertight exterior joints in
vertical-plane walls (above-grade).
Type: Preformed cellular foam.
a.
Foam Material: Preformed sealant shall be silicone pre-coated, preformed, precompressed, self-expanding, sealant system.
079500-1
079500
EXPANSION CONTROL
b.
c.
2.4
Expanding foam to be cellular foam impregnated with a water-based, non-drying,
polymer-modified 100% acrylic dispersion. Uncompressed impregnation density
not to exceed 150 kg per cubic meter. Seal shall combine factory-applied, lowmodulus silicone and a backing of acrylic-impregnated expanding foam into a
unified hybrid sealant system. Silicone must be proved to have been tested for
hardness according to ASTM D2240 (Shore-A hardness not to exceed 25).
Product must be proved to have been tested to exceed the requirements of curtain
wall performance tests ASTM E-330, E-283, and E-331. Product must be proved
to have been tested to Xenon Arc Weatherometer testing which includes
Intentional Damage to Primary Surface with no performance change over 2000
hours according to ASTM G26-77. Product movement capability to be minimum
+25% and -25% (total 50%) of nominal material size.
Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. Silicone external
color facing to be factory-applied to the foam while it is partially pre-compressed to
a width greater than maximum joint extension and cured before final compression.
When compressed to final supplied dimension, a bellows with distinct and uniform
folds to handle movement must be created in the silicone coating. Silicone coating
to be available in a range of not less than 12 colors for coordination with typical
building materials.
FINISHES
A.
Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, and instructions for installing joint
systems. Provide fasteners of metal, type, and size to suit type of construction.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for storing, handling, and installing architectural
joint assemblies and materials unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
B.
Foam Seals: Install with adhesive recommended by manufacturer.
1.
2.
C.
Sealant must be supplied pre-compressed to less than the joint size, packaged in shrinkwrapped lengths (sticks) with a mounting adhesive on one face. End to end joins of
consecutive lengths of material to be butted and joined bellows surfaces to be lightly
coated with silicone. To obtain identical color sealant, use sealant supplied by
manufacturer. Depth of seal as recommended by manufacturer.
Sealing against the substrate to be achieved through a combination of the pressuresensitive adhesive impregnation, and the backpressure of the expanding foam, as well as
through the addition, by the contractor in the field, of a corner bead of silicone supplied by
the sealant manufacturer.
Water Barrier: Provide water barrier at exterior joints and where called for on Drawings.
079500-2
079500
3.3
EXPANSION CONTROL
PROTECTION
A.
Do not remove protective covering until finish work in adjacent areas is complete.
B.
Protect the installation from damage by work of other Sections.
079500-3
081113
SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
1.2
Standard hollow metal doors and frames.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include elevations, door edge details, frame profiles, metal thicknesses,
preparations for hardware, and other details.
C.
Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.
D.
Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required.
E.
Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for
details and openings as those on Drawings.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled
by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive
pressure according to NFPA 252 .
B.
Smoke-Control Door Assemblies: Comply with NFPA 105 or UL 1784 .
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers:
following :
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
Amweld Building Products, LLC.
Benchmark; a division of Therma-Tru Corporation.
Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company.
Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group company.
Deansteel Manufacturing Company, Inc.
Firedoor Corporation.
Fleming Door Products Ltd.; an Assa Abloy Group company.
Habersham Metal Products Company.
Kewanee Corporation (The).
081113-1
081113
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
2.2
Mesker Door Inc.
Pioneer Industries, Inc.
Security Metal Products Corp.
Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company.
Windsor Republic Doors.
MATERIALS
A.
Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet:
applications.
B.
Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, CS, Type B.
C.
Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with
minimum A40 metallic coating.
D.
Frame Anchors: ASTM A 591/A 591M, Commercial Steel (CS), 40Z coating designation; mill
phosphatized.
1.
ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, CS, Type B; suitable for exposed
For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M
or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M,
Class B.
E.
Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.
F.
Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches, as measured according to
ASTM C 143/C 143M.
G.
Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I.
H.
Glazing: Division 08 Section "Glazing."
I.
Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil dry
film thickness per coat.
2.3
STANDARD HOLLOW METAL DOORS
A.
General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8.
1.
2.
Design: Flush panel.
Core Construction:
Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, polystyrene,
polyurethane, polyisocyanurate, mineral-board, or vertical steel-stiffener core.
a.
b.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Fire Door Core: As required to provide fire-protection ratings indicated.
Thermal-Rated (Insulated) Doors: U-value of not less than 0.37
Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Beveled edge, 1/8 inch in 2 inches. .
Top and Bottom Edges: Closed with flush or inverted 0.042-inch- thick, end closures or
channels of same material as face sheets.
Tolerances: SDI 117, "Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and Frames."
Exterior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet. Comply with
ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level:
081113-2
081113
1.
Level 2 and Physical Performance Level B (Heavy Duty), Model 1 (Full Flush) .
C.
Interior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet unless metallic-coated sheet
is indicated. Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing
ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level:
1.
Level 2 and Physical Performance Level B (Heavy Duty), Model 1 (Full Flush) .
D.
Hardware Reinforcement: ANSI/SDI A250.6.
2.4
STANDARD HOLLOW METAL FRAMES
A.
General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8.
B.
Exterior Frames: Fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet.
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Interior Frames:
indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
D.
2.5
Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners.
Fabricate frames as welded frames. Knocked down frames are only acceptable when
installing frame in existing wall and should be welded after installation.
Frames should be reinforced for closer whether a closer is specified or not.
Frames for Level 2 Steel Doors: 0.059-inch / 16 ga- thick steel sheet.
Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet unless metallic-coated sheet is
Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners.
Fabricate frames as welded frames. Knocked down frames are only acceptable when
installing frame in existing wall and should be welded after installation.
Frames should be reinforced for closer whether a closer is specified or not.
Frames for Level 2 Steel Doors: 0.059-inch / 16 ga- thick steel sheet.
Frames for Wood Doors: 0.059-inch / 16 ga- thick steel sheet.
Frames for Borrowed Lights: Same as adjacent door frame.
Hardware Reinforcement: ANSI/SDI A250.6.
FRAME ANCHORS
A.
Jamb Anchors:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not
less than 0.042 inch thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 inches
wide by 10 inches long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177 inch thick.
Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042
inch thick.
Compression Type for Drywall Slip-on Frames: Adjustable compression anchors.
Postinstalled Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 3/8-inchdiameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from frame to wall,
with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor location.
Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.042 inch thick, and as
follows:
1.
Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners.
081113-3
081113
2.
2.6
Separate Topping Concrete Slabs: Adjustable-type anchors with extension clips,
allowing not less than 2-inch height adjustment. Terminate bottom of frames at finish
floor surface.
HOLLOW METAL PANELS
A.
2.7
Provide hollow metal panels of same materials, construction, and finish as specified for
adjoining hollow metal work.
LOUVERS
A.
2.8
Provide sightproof louvers for interior doors, where indicated, that comply with SDI 111C, with
blades or baffles formed of 0.020-inch- thick, cold-rolled steel sheet set into 0.032-inch- thick
steel frame.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Mullions and Transom Bars: Join to adjacent members by welding or rigid mechanical anchors.
B.
Ceiling Struts: Minimum 1/4-inch-thick by 1-inchwide steel.
C.
Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inch thick.
2.9
FABRICATION
A.
Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in SDI 117.
B.
Hollow Metal Doors:
1.
2.
3.
C.
Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottom of exterior doors. Seal joints in
top edges of doors against water penetration.
Glazed Lites: Factory cut openings in doors.
Astragals: Provide overlapping astragal on one leaf of pairs of doors where required by
NFPA 80 for fire-performance rating or where indicated.
Hollow Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections, provide alignment plates or
angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth,
flush, and invisible.
Sidelight and Transom Bar Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face
seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at
crossings and to jambs by butt welding.
Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners
unless otherwise indicated.
Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be
grouted.
Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot
welds per anchor.
Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:
081113-4
081113
a.
Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of
frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
b.
c.
7.
3.
4.
2.
A.
Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to ANSI/SDI A250.8.
Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised and surface-mounted
door hardware.
Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/SDI A250.6 and ANSI/DHI A115 Series
specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware.
Coordinate locations of conduit and wiring boxes for electrical connections with
Division 26 electrical Sections.
Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated. Form
corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints.
1.
2.10
Single-Door Frames: Three door silencers.
Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive templated mortised
hardware according to the Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in
Division 08 Section "Door Hardware."
1.
2.
E.
Compression Type: Not less than two anchors in each jamb.
Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches from top
and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches o.c.
Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped doors, drill stops to receive door silencers.
a.
D.
Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high.
Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high.
Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches high.
Five anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches
or fraction thereof above 96 inches high.
Two anchors per head for frames more than 42 inches wide and mounted in
metal-stud partitions.
Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of hollow
metal work.
Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with type of glazing and type
of installation indicated.
STEEL FINISHES
Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating.
1.
Shop Primer: ANSI/SDI A250.10.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Hollow Metal Frames: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.11.
081113-5
081113
1.
Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent
anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving
surfaces smooth and undamaged.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.
Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and
secure with postinstalled expansion anchors.
a.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Floor anchors may be set with powder-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled
expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings.
Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation behind frames.
Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space between
frames and masonry with grout.
Concrete Walls: Solidly fill space between frames and concrete with grout. Take
precautions, including bracing frames, to ensure that frames are not deformed or
damaged by grout forces.
In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled
expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible
on exposed faces.
In-Place Gypsum Board Partitions: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion
anchors through floor anchors at each jamb. Countersink anchors, and fill and make
smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.
Ceiling Struts: Extend struts vertically from top of frame at each jamb to overhead
structural supports or substrates above frame unless frame is anchored to masonry or to
other structural support at each jamb. Bend top of struts to provide flush contact for
securing to supporting construction. Provide adjustable wedged or bolted anchorage to
frame jamb members.
Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow metal door frames for squareness, alignment,
twist, and plumb to the following tolerances:
a.
b.
c.
d.
B.
At fire-protection-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80.
Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling
limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously;
grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.
Install frames with removable glazing stops located on secure side of opening.
Install door silencers in frames before grouting.
Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been
properly set and secured.
Check plumbness, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed.
Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances.
Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that are filled with grout
containing antifreezing agents.
Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90
degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.
Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line
parallel to plane of wall.
Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on
parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.
Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor.
Hollow Metal Doors: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified
below. Shim as necessary.
1.
Non-Fire-Rated Standard Steel Doors:
081113-6
081113
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
C.
Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80.
Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing" and with hollow
metal manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
3.2
Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch.
Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch.
Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch.
Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold): Maximum 3/4
inch.
Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly not
more than 9 inches o.c. and not more than 2 inches o.c. from each corner.
A.
Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final
inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace
defective work, including hollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.
B.
Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of
prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.
C.
Metallic-Coated Surfaces: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
081113-7
081416
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
SECTION 081416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
1.2
Solid-core doors with wood-veneer faces.
Division 08 Section "Glazing" for glass view panels in flush wood doors.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of door indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door;
construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware blocking; and
other pertinent data.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware.
Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts.
Indicate requirements for veneer matching.
Indicate fire-protection ratings for fire-rated doors.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with AWI's "Architectural
Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated."
B.
Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a
qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive
pressure according to NFPA 252 .
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Algoma Hardwoods, Inc.
Ampco, Inc.
Buell Door Company Inc.
Chappell Door Co.
Eagle Plywood & Door Manufacturing, Inc.
081416-1
081416
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
2.2
Eggers Industries.
Graham; an Assa Abloy Group company.
Haley Brothers, Inc.
Ideal Architectural Doors & Plywood.
Ipik Door Company.
Lambton Doors.
Marlite.
Marshfield Door Systems, Inc.
Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc.; a Masonite company.
Oshkosh Architectural Door Company.
Poncraft Door Company.
Vancouver Door Company.
VT Industries Inc.
.Lynden
DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL
A.
Low-Emitting Materials: Provide doors made with adhesives and composite wood products that
do not contain urea formaldehyde.
B.
WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade:
1.
C.
Particleboard-Core Doors:
1.
2.
3.
D.
Heavy Duty unless otherwise indicated.
Particleboard:
ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-1 made with binder containing no ureaformaldehyde resin.
Blocking: Provide wood blocking in particleboard-core doors as needed to eliminate
through-bolting hardware.
Provide doors with
either glued-wood-stave or structural-composite-lumber cores
instead of particleboard cores for doors indicated to receive exit devices.
Structural-Composite-Lumber-Core Doors:
1.
Structural Composite Lumber: WDMA I.S.10.
a.
b.
E.
Fire-Protection-Rated Doors: Provide core specified or mineral core as needed to provide fireprotection rating indicated.
1.
2.
F.
Screw Withdrawal, Face: 700 lbf.
Screw Withdrawal, Edge: 400 lbf.
Edge Construction: Provide edge construction with intumescent seals concealed by
outer stile. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.
Pairs: Provide fire-retardant stiles that are listed and labeled for applications indicated
without formed-steel edges and astragals. Comply with specified requirements for
exposed edges.
Mineral-Core Doors:
1.
Core: Noncombustible mineral product complying with requirements of referenced
quality standard and testing and inspecting agency for fire-protection rating indicated.
081416-2
081416
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
2.
3.
2.3
Blocking: Provide composite blocking with improved screw-holding capability approved
for use in doors of fire-protection ratings indicated as needed to eliminate through-bolting
hardware.
Edge Construction: At hinge stiles, provide laminated-edge construction with improved
screw-holding capability and split resistance. Comply with specified requirements for
exposed edges.
VENEERED-FACED DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH
A.
Interior Solid-Core Doors :
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
2.4
Grade: Premium, with Grade A faces .
Species: Select white birch
.
Cut: Plain sliced (flat sliced) .
Match between Veneer Leaves: Pleasing match.
Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Balance match.
Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening.
Core: Particleboard .
Construction: Five or seven plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit
abrasive planed before veneering.
LOUVERS AND LIGHT FRAMES
A.
Metal Louvers:
1.
2.5
Metal and Finish: Hot-dip galvanized steel, 0.040 inch thick, factory primed for paint
finish .
FABRICATION
A.
Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of
referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated.
1.
Comply with requirements in NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.
B.
Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied.
C.
Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors in factory.
1.
2.
Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated.
Louvers: Factory install louvers in prepared openings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and the
referenced quality standard, and as indicated.
1.
Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80.
081416-3
081416
B.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels; do not trim
stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted for fire-rated doors. Machine
doors for hardware. Seal edges of doors, edges of cutouts, and mortises after fitting and
machining.
1.
Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/8
inch from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering unless otherwise
indicated. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 inch from bottom of door
to top of threshold unless otherwise indicated.
a.
C.
Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.
Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.
081416-4
083113
SECTION 083113 - ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
This Section includes access doors and frames for walls and ceilings.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of access door and frame indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
C.
Samples: For each door face material in specified finish.
D.
Schedule: Types, locations, sizes, latching or locking provisions, and other data pertinent to
installation.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fire-Rated Access Doors and Frames: Units complying with NFPA 80 that are identical to
assemblies tested for fire-test-response characteristics per the following test method and that
are listed and labeled by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction:
1.
2.
1.4
NFPA 252 or UL 10B for vertical access doors and frames.
ASTM E 119 or UL 263 for horizontal access doors and frames.
COORDINATION
A.
Verification: Determine specific locations and sizes for access doors needed to gain access to
concealed plumbing, mechanical, or other concealed work, and indicate in the schedule
specified in "Submittals" Article.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
STEEL MATERIALS
A.
Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
1.
2.
B.
ASTM A 123/A 123M, for galvanizing steel and iron products.
ASTM A 153/A 153M, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware.
Steel Sheet: Uncoated or electrolytic zinc-coated, ASTM A 591/A 591M with cold-rolled steel
sheet substrate complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), exposed.
083113-1
083113
C.
Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS) with A60 zinc-ironalloy (galvannealed) coating or G60 mill-phosphatized zinc coating.
D.
Steel Finishes: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal
Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
1.
2.
3.
Factory-Primed Finish: Manufacturer's standard shop primer.
Baked-Enamel Finish: Minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils.
Powder-Coat Finish: Thickness not less than 1.5 mils.
E.
Drywall Beads: 0.0299-inch zinc-coated steel sheet to receive joint compound.
F.
Plaster Beads: 0.0299-inch zinc-coated steel sheet with flange of expanded metal lath.
G.
Manufacturer's standard finish.
2.2
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES FOR WALLS AND CEILINGS
A.
Flush Access Doors and Frames with Exposed Trim: Fabricated from steel sheet.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Fire-Rated, Insulated, Flush Access Doors and Frames with Exposed Trim: Fabricated from
steel sheet.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
2.3
Locations: Wall.
Door: Minimum 0.060-inch- thick sheet metal.
Frame: Minimum 0.060-inch- thick sheet metal with 1-1/4-inchwide, surface-mounted
trim.
Hinges: Spring-loaded, concealed-pin type.
Latch: Cam latchwith interior release.
Lock: Cylinder.
Locations: Wall surfaces.
Fire-Resistance Rating: Not less than that of adjacent construction.
Temperature Rise Rating: 250 deg F at the end of 30 minutes.
Door: Flush panel with a core of mineral-fiber insulation enclosed in sheet metal with a
minimum thickness of 0.036 inch.
Frame: Minimum 0.060-inch- thick sheet metal with 1-inchwide, surface-mounted trim.
Hinges: Concealed-pin type.
Automatic Closer: Spring type.
Latch: Self-latching device operated by flush key with interior release.
Lock: Self-latching device with cylinder lock.
FABRICATION
A.
General: Provide access door and frame assemblies manufactured as integral units ready for
installation.
B.
Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view, provide materials with smooth, flat
surfaces without blemishes.
C.
Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish
attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access panels to types of supports
indicated.
083113-2
083113
D.
Latching Mechanisms: Furnish number required to hold doors in flush, smooth plane when
closed.
1.
For cylinder lock, furnish two keys per lock and key all locks alike.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames.
B.
Set frames accurately in position and attach securely to supports with plane of face panels
aligned with adjacent finish surfaces.
C.
Install doors flush with adjacent finish surfaces or recessed to receive finish material.
3.2
A.
Adjust doors and hardware after installation for proper operation.
B.
Remove and replace doors and frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged.
083113-3
083613
SECTIONAL DOORS
SECTION 083613 - SECTIONAL DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes electrically operated sectional doors.
B.
Related Section:
1.
1.2
Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for miscellaneous steel supports.
A.
General Performance: Sectional doors shall meet performance requirements specified without
failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction
and without requiring temporary installation of reinforcing components.
B.
Delegated Design: Design sectional doors, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a
qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.
C.
Structural Performance: Exterior sectional doors shall withstand the effects of gravity loads,
and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to
ASCE/SEI 7.
D.
Air Infiltration: Maximum rate not more than indicated when tested according to ASTM E 283 or
DASMA 105.
E.
Seismic Performance: Sectional doors shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions
determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type and size of sectional door and accessory.
B.
Shop Drawings: For each installation and for special components not dimensioned or detailed
in manufacturer's product data. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to
other work.
C.
D.
Delegated-Design Submittal: For sectional doors indicated to comply with performance
requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified
professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
E.
Seismic Qualification Certificates:
manufacturer.
F.
Maintenance data.
For sectional doors, accessories, and components, from
083613-1
083613
G.
1.4
SECTIONAL DOORS
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved
for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.
B.
Standard for Sectional Doors: Fabricate sectional doors to comply with DASMA 102 unless
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
1.1
MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Supplier: Overhead Door Corporation National Accounts, 2501 S. State Hwy.
121, Suite 200, Lewisville, TX 75067. Phone: (469) 549-7121. Web Site:
www.nationalaccounts.overheaddoor.com. E-mail: [email protected]
B. Substitutions: Not permitted.
1.2
INSULATED SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS
A. Insulated Steel Sectional Overhead Doors: 591 Series Thermacore Insulated Steel Doors by
Overhead Door Corporation. Units shall have the following characteristics:
1.
Door Assembly: Metal/foam/metal sandwich panel construction, with PVC thermal
break and weather-tight ship-lap design meeting joints.
a.
Panel Thickness: 1-5/8 inches (41 mm).
b.
Exterior Surface: Ribbed, textured.
c.
Exterior Steel: .015 inch (.38 mm), hot-dipped galvanized.
d.
End Stiles: 16 gauge.
e.
Spring Counterbalance: Sized to weight of the door, with a helically wound, oil
tempered torsion spring mounted on a steel shaft; cable drum of diecast
aluminum with high strength galvanized aircraft cable. Sized with a minimum 7
to 1 safety factor.
1)
High cycle spring: 50,000 cycles.
f.
Insulation: CFC-free and HCFC-free polyurethane, fully encapsulated.
g.
Thermal Values: R-value of 14.86; U-value of 0.067.
h.
Air Infiltration: 0.08 cfm at 15 mph; 0.08 cfm at 25 mph.
a.
Partial Glazing of Steel Panels:
1)
Qty. Two (2) 25x12 Double Thermal Acrylic Oval windows
b.
Cable Safety Device: Include, on each side-edge of door, a device designed to
automatically stop door if either lifting cable brakes.
2.
Finish and Color:
a.
Two coat baked-on polyester:
1)
Interior color, white.
2)
Exterior color, white.
3.
Windload Design: Provide to meet the Design/Performance requirements specified.
4.
Hardware: Galvanized steel hinges and fixtures. Ball bearing rollers with hardened
steel races.
5.
Lock: Interior mounted slide lock.
6.
Weather Stripping:
a.
Rodent Blocker Bottom Seal, Provided by Overhead Door Corporation
b.
Flexible Jamb seals.
c.
Flexible Header seal.
7.
Track: Provide track as recommended by manufacturer to suit loading required and
clearances available.
a.
Size: 2 inch (51 mm).
b.
Type: High lift.
8.
Manual Operation: Pull rope.
083613-2
083613
SECTIONAL DOORS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install sectional doors and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, anchors,
inserts, hangers, and equipment supports; according to manufacturer's written instructions and
as specified.
B.
Tracks: Provide sway bracing, diagonal bracing, and reinforcement as required for rigid
installation of track and door-operating equipment. Repair galvanized coating on tracks
according to ASTM A 780.
C.
Adjust hardware and moving parts to function smoothly so that doors operate easily, free of
warp, twist, or distortion. Adjust doors and seals to provide weathertight fit around entire
perimeter.
3.2
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain sectional doors.
083613-3
084113
SECTION 084113 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.2
Exterior and interior storefront framing.
Storefront framing for window walls.
Storefront framing for ribbon walls.
Storefront framing for punched openings.
Exterior and interior manual-swing entrance doors and door frame units.
A.
General Performance: Aluminum-framed systems shall withstand the effects of the following
performance requirements without exceeding performance criteria or failure due to defective
manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction:
1.
2.
3.
Movements of supporting structure indicated on Drawings including, but not limited to,
story drift and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads.
Dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction.
Failure includes the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Deflection exceeding specified limits.
Thermal stresses transferring to building structure.
Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and
structural movements to glazing.
Noise or vibration created by wind and by thermal and structural movements.
Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components.
Failure of operating units.
B.
Delegated Design: Design aluminum-framed systems, including comprehensive engineering
analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design
criteria indicated.
C.
Wind Loads: for local conditions.
D.
Deflection of Framing Members:
1.
2.
Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to 1/175 of clear span for spans up to 13 feet 6
inches and to 1/240 of clear span plus 1/4 inch for spans greater than 13 feet 6 inches or
an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch, whichever is
less.
Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to amount not exceeding that which
reduces glazing bite to less than 75 percent of design dimension and that which reduces
edge clearance between framing members and glazing or other fixed components
directly below them to less than 1/8 inch and clearance between members and operable
units directly below them to less than 1/16 inch.
084113-1
084113
E.
Structural-Test Performance:
ASTM E 330 as follows:
1.
2.
Provide aluminum-framed systems tested according to
When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures,
systems, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, and
permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span.
Test Durations: 10 seconds.
F.
Air Infiltration: Provide aluminum-framed systems with maximum air leakage through fixed
glazing and framing areas of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. of fixed wall area when tested according to
ASTM E 283 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. .
G.
Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Provide aluminum-framed systems that do not
evidence water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to
ASTM E 331 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 20 percent of positive wind-load
design pressure, but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft.
H.
U-Value: Minimum U-0.38
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Shop Drawings: For aluminum-framed systems. Include plans, elevations, sections, details,
and attachments to other work.
1.
Include details of provisions for system expansion and contraction and for drainage of
moisture in the system to the exterior.
C.
Samples: For each type of exposed finish required.
D.
Other Action Submittals:
1.
Entrance Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier,
detailing fabrication and assembly of entrance door hardware, as well as procedures and
diagrams.
E.
Delegated-Design Submittal:
For aluminum-framed systems indicated to comply with
performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the
qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
F.
G.
Field quality-control reports.
H.
Maintenance data.
I.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved
for installation of units required for this Project.
084113-2
084113
B.
Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 699 for testing indicated.
C.
Engineering Responsibility: Prepare data for aluminum-framed systems, including Shop
Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in
systems similar to those indicated for this Project.
D.
Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for
systems' aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by
dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they
relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics
are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including preconstruction
testing, field testing, and in-service performance.
E.
Accessible Entrances:
Comply with applicable provisions in [the U.S. Architectural &
Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines] [and]
[ICC/ANSI A117.1].
F.
Source Limitations for Aluminum-Framed Systems:
manufacturer.
1.5
Obtain from single source from single
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of aluminum-framed systems that do not comply with requirements or that
fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1.
B.
Warranty Period: Two
years from date of Substantial Completion.
Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair
or replace components on which finishes do not comply with requirements or that fail in
materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Warranty does not include normal
weathering.
1.
Warranty Period:
20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by one of the
following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following]:
B.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated
on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Arcadia, Inc.
Arch Aluminum & Glass Co., Inc.
CMI Architectural.
Commercial Architectural Products, Inc.
EFCO Corporation.
Kawneer North America; an Alcoa company.
084113-3
084113
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
2.2
Leed Himmel Industries, Inc.
Pittco Architectural Metals, Inc.
TRACO.
Tubelite.
United States Aluminum.
Vistawall Architectural Products; The Vistawall Group; a Bluescope Steel company.
YKK AP America Inc.
Manko Window Systems Inc.
MATERIALS
A.
Aluminum:
indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209.
Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221.
Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429.
Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M.
Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS A5.10/A5.10M.
Steel Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard zinc-rich, corrosion-resistant primer, complying
with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after surface preparation and
pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPCSP COM and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard.
1.
2.
3.
2.3
Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish
Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M.
Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M.
FRAMING SYSTEMS
A.
Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded-aluminum framing members of thickness
required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Construction: Thermally improved .
Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides .
Glazing Plane: Center
U-Value: U-0.38
B.
Brackets and Reinforcements:
Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with
nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.
C.
Fasteners and Accessories:
Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining,
nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.
1.
2.
D.
Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from
thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration.
Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads.
Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel inserts,
complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M.
084113-4
084113
E.
Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding
flashing compatible with adjacent materials .
F.
Framing System Gaskets and Sealants:
manufacturer for joint type.
1.
2.4
Manufacturer's standard, recommended by
Provide sealants for use inside of the weatherproofing system that have a VOC content
of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
GLAZING SYSTEMS
A.
Glazing: As specified in Division 08 Section "Glazing."
B.
Glazing Gaskets:
Manufacturer's standard compression types; replaceable, molded or
extruded, of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal.
C.
Spacers and Setting Blocks: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric type.
2.5
ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEMS
A.
Entrance Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed entrance doors for manual-swing operation.
1.
2.
Door Construction:
2- to 2-1/4-inch overall thickness, with minimum 0.125-inch- thick,
extruded-aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with
reinforcing brackets that are deeply penetrated and fillet welded or that incorporate
concealed tie rods.
a.
Thermal Construction: High-performance plastic connectors separate aluminum
members exposed to the exterior from members exposed to the interior.
b.
Minimum U-value of 0.77
Door Design:
a.
3.
2.6
Accessible Doors: Smooth surfaced for width of door in area within 10 inches
above floor or ground plane.
Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Square , snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and preformed
gaskets.
a.
B.
Medium stile; 3-1/2-inch nominal width .
Provide nonremovable glazing stops on outside of door.
Entrance Door Hardware: As specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware."
ENTRANCE DOOR HARDWARE
A.
General: Provide entrance door hardware and entrance door hardware sets indicated in door
and frame schedule for each entrance door to comply with requirements in this Section.
1.
2.
Entrance Door Hardware Sets: Provided and installed by owner.
Opening-Force Requirements:
084113-5
084113
a.
b.
B.
Egress Doors: Not more than 15 lbf to release the latch and not more than 30 lbf
to set the door in motion and not more than 15 lbf to open the door to its minimum
required width.
Accessible Interior Doors: Not more than 5 lbf to fully open door.
Opening-Force Requirements:
1.
2.
Delayed-Egress Locks: Lock releases within 15 seconds after applying a force of not
more than 15 lbf for not more than 3 seconds.
Latches and Exit Devices: Not more than 15 lbf required to release latch.
C.
Continuous-Gear Hinges: Manufacturer's standard with stainless-steel bearings between
knuckles, fabricated to full height of door and frame.
D.
Mortise Auxiliary Locks: BHMA A156.5, Grade 1.
E.
Manual Flush Bolts: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1.
F.
Automatic and Self-Latching Flush Bolts: BHMA A156.3, Grade 1.
G.
Panic Exit Devices: BHMA A156.3, Grade 1, listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for panic protection, based on testing
according to UL 305.
H.
Cylinders: [BHMA A156.5, Grade 1.]
I.
Strikes: Provide strike with black-plastic dust box for each latch or lock bolt; fabricated for
aluminum framing.
J.
Operating Trim: BHMA A156.6.
K.
Removable Mullions: BHMA A156.3, extruded aluminum.
1.
When used with panic exit devices, provide removable mullions listed and labeled by a
testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for panic
protection, based on testing according to UL 305. Use only mullions that have been
tested with exit devices to be used.
L.
Closers: BHMA A156.4, Grade 1, with accessories required for a complete installation, sized as
required by door size, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use; adjustable to
meet field conditions and requirements for opening force.
M.
Surface-Mounted Holders: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1.
N.
Door Stops: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1, floor or wall mounted, as appropriate for door location
indicated, with integral rubber bumper.
O.
Weather Stripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable components.
P.
Weather Sweeps: Manufacturer's standard exterior-door bottom sweep with concealed
fasteners on mounting strip.
Q.
Silencers: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1.
084113-6
084113
R.
Thresholds: BHMA A156.21, raised thresholds beveled with a slope of not more than 1:2, with
maximum height of 1/2 inch.
S.
Finger Guards: Manufacturer's standard collapsible neoprene or PVC gasket anchored to
frame hinge-jamb at center-pivoted doors.
2.7
FABRICATION
A.
Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing.
B.
Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of
finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or
grinding.
C.
Framing Members, General: Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following
characteristics:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations.
Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered.
Means to drain water passing joints, condensation within framing members, and moisture
migrating within the system to exterior.
Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members.
Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to
maintain required glazing edge clearances.
Provisions for field replacement of glazing from interior .
Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest
extent possible.
D.
Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting stops.
E.
Entrance Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and
for installing entrance door hardware.
F.
Entrance Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing entrance door hardware.
G.
Entrance Door Hardware Installation: Factory install entrance door hardware to the greatest
extent possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed entrance door hardware before applying
finishes.
H.
After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop
Drawings.
2.8
ALUMINUM FINISHES
A.
Color Anodic Finish: Class I, anodic coating complying with AAMA 611. Color per drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
General:
084113-7
084113
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Metal Protection:
1.
2.
Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting
contact surfaces with primer or applying sealant or tape, or by installing nonconductive
spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.
Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting
contact surfaces with bituminous paint.
C.
Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing
members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior.
D.
Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Division 07 Section
"Joint Sealants" to produce weathertight installation.
E.
Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades, and without
warp or rack.
F.
Install glazing as specified in Division 08 Section "Glazing."
G.
Entrance Doors: Install doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points.
1.
2.
3.2
Exterior Doors: Install to produce weathertight enclosure and tight fit at weather
stripping.
Field-Installed Entrance Door Hardware:
Install surface-mounted entrance door
hardware according to entrance door hardware manufacturers' written instructions using
concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible.
A.
3.3
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
Do not install damaged components.
Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.
Rigidly secure nonmovement joints.
Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic
deterioration.
Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.
Aluminum-framed assemblies will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and
inspections.
ENTRANCE DOOR HARDWARE SETS
084113-8
084229.23
SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES
DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS
SECTION 084229.23 - SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES
PART I – GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. WORK INCLUDED: Furnish complete automatic aluminum door system, as specified, that has been
manufactured, fabricated and installed to maintain performance criteria stated by manufacturer without defects,
damage or failure.
B. RELATED WORK:
1. Concrete: Division 03, applicable sections.
2. Thermal and Moisture Protection: Division 07, applicable sections.
3. Openings: Division 08, applicable sections.
4. Electrical: Division 26, applicable sections.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. AMERICAN ARCHITECTURAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (AAMA) 101: Appendix Dissimilar
Materials.
B. AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF AUTOMATIC DOOR MANUFACTURERS (AAADM).
C. AMERICAN ARCHITECTURAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (AAMA) 1303.5: Voluntary Specifications
for Forced-Entry Resistant Aluminum Sliding Glass Doors
D. AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI):
1. ANSI Z97.1: Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings - Methods of Test.
2. ANSI A156.10: For Power Operated Pedestrian Doors; Sliding Doors section.
3. ANSI A156.5: Standard for Auxiliary Locks and Associated Products
E. AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM);
1. ASTM B221: Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Shapes and Tubes.
2. ASTM E330-97: (Wind load) Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain
Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.
3. ASTM E283-91: (Air Infiltration) Standard test method for rate of air leakage through exterior windows,
curtain walls, and doors.
F. BUILDING OFFICIALS AND CODE ADMINISTRATORS INTERNATIONAL (BOCA)
G. INTERNATIONAL CONFERENCE OF BUILDING OFFICIALS / UNIFORM BUILDING CODE (ICBO/UBC)
H. INTERNATIONAL CODE COUNCIL / INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE (ICC/IBC)
I. NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA) 101:
1. NFPA 101: Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings & Structures.
2. NFPA 70: National Electrical Code (NEC).
J. THE ALUMINUM ASSOCIATION (AA) Aluminum Finishes Manual.
K. UNDERWRITERS LABORATORY, INC. (USA & CANADA) UL 325: Electrical Door, Drapery, Gate, Louver, and
Window Operators and Systems.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. PRODUCT DATA: Submit manufacturer's complete product and installation data.
B. SHOP DRAWINGS: Submit drawings showing layout, profiles, product components including anchorage,
accessories, finish and glazing details (where required).
C. CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS: Submit the following:
1. Owner’s Manual.
2. Warranty document as specified herein.
3. AAADM inspection compliance form completed and signed by certified AAADM inspector prior to doors being
placed in operation as proof of compliance with ANSI A156.10.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. INSTALLERS QUALIFICATIONS: Installer shall be factory trained, certified by AAADM, and experienced to
perform work of this section.
B. MANUFACTURER’S QUALIFICATIONS: Manufacturer to have minimum (5) five years successful experience in
the fabrication of automatic doors of the type required for this project. Manufacturer capable of providing field
service representation during installation, approving acceptable installer and approving application method.
C. CERTIFICATIONS: Automatic sliding door systems and options shall be factory certified to meet performance
design criteria in accordance with the following standards:
1. ANSI A156.10: For Power Operated Pedestrian Doors; Sliding Doors section.
2. NFPA 101: Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings & Structures.
3. UL 325: Electrical Door, Drapery, Gate, Louver, and Window Operators and Systems.
4. BOCA: Means of Egress, Power Operated Doors
5. ICBO/UBC: Egress Through Lobbies
6. ICC/IBC: Egress Section
084229.23-1
084229.23
7. ICC/IEC: Energy Requirements
D. WIND LOAD: Structural Performance per ASTM E330-07: Measured +/-39 psf with no glass breakage or
permanent deformation with doors locked.
E. U-VALUE: Minimum of U-0.77
F. AIR INFILTRATION: per ASTM E283-91:
1. Standard Test Pressure @ 1.57 psf, Measured 0.462 cfm/ft² (ASTM Allowable 1.20 cfm/ft²)
2. Additional Test Pressure @ 6.24 psf, Measured 1.052 cfm/ft²
G. FORCED ENTRY RESISTANCE: Sliding doors shall meet requirement of AAMA 1303.5.
H. OPERATING RANGE: -30° F to 130° F (-34° C to 54° C)
I. OPENING FORCE REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY EGRESS:
1. Slide-swing panels shall require no more than 50 lbf. (222 N) of force to swing open. Slide-swing panels shall
be capable of swinging out 90° from any position of slide movement.
2. Slide-swing panels and swing-out sidelites shall have torsion spring designed to re-close panel if pushed
open in the direction of egress.
3. If power fails, slide panels can be manually slid open with no more than 15 lbf (222 N) of force.
4. Units are UL listed as an exit way and are compliant with NFPA 101.
J. CLOSING FORCE REQUIREMENTS: Maximum force required to prevent sliding panel from closing = 28 lbf.
(124.5 N) Adjustable Reversing Circuit will reopen door unit if closing path is obstructed.
K. HEADER CAPACITY: Header shall be capable of supporting:
1. Biparting: Up to 250 lbs. (113.4 kg) per slide panel over spans up to 16’-0” (4877mm) without intermediate
supports.
2. Single Slide: Up to 350 lbs. (158.7 kg) per slide panel over spans up to 9’-0” (2743mm) without intermediate
supports
1.05 WARRANTIES
A. MANUFACTURER'S WARRANTY: Units to be warranted against defect in material and workmanship for a
period of one year from the Date of Substantial Completion.
Manufacturer's warranty is in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights owner may have under Contract
Documents.
B. DISTRIBUTOR'S WARRANTY: One year warranty: Labor & transportation charges for defective parts
replacement.
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS
FIELD MEASUREMENTS: Verify actual dimensions/openings by field measurements before fabrication and record
on shop drawings. Coordinate with fabrication and construction schedule to avoid construction delays.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. ORDERING AND DELIVERY: Comply with factory's ordering instructions and lead time requirements. Delivery
shall be in factory's original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact.
B. STORAGE AND PROTECTION: Provide protection from exposure to harmful weather conditions and vandalism.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURER
HORTON AUTOMATICS, a division of Overhead Door Corporation, shall manufacture automatic sliding door(s) of
type(s) and size(s) specified on plans and door schedule.
2.02 EQUIPMENT
A. MANUFACTURED DOOR UNITS: Shall include operator, header with roller track, carrier assemblies, framing
jambs, sliding door panel(s), sidelite(s), activation, safety devices and accessories required for complete
installation.
1. Configuration: Single Slide or Biparting
A6.3
2. Mounting Type:
a. Perimeter mounted within rough opening with sliding panel(s) sliding along sidelite.
b. Surface mounted with sliding panel(s) sliding along wall eliminating need for sidelite.
3. Door Type:
a. Type 010: Sliding panel(s) ‘X’ shall slide along interior side.
b. Type 110: Slide-swing panel(s) ‘SX’ shall slide along exterior side.
c. Type 310: Slide-swing panel(s) ‘SX’ shall slide along interior side. Unit has Swing-out sidelite ‘SO’.
d. Type 410: Slide-swing panel(s) ‘SX’ shall slide between fixed and swing-out sidelite ‘O/SO’.
e. SpaceSaver™: Dual single slide units with common sidelite. Slide-swing panel ‘SX’ shall slide along
exterior side of middle sidelite ‘O’ from one direction and sliding panel ‘X’ shall slide along interior side
from opposite direction.
B. OPERATOR: The Electric Operating Mechanism shall be Profiler® Series 2000 Linear Drive. The operator shall
be mounted and concealed within the header.
084229.23-2
084229.23
1. Operation shall be accomplished through a 1/8 HP DC permanent magnet working with a threadless,
induction hardened stainless steel 1/2" (13mm) diameter linear drive shaft. Maximum current draw shall not
exceed 3.15 amps. A linear travel block describes a helical path along the rotating shaft utilizing six aircraft
quality ball bearings acting as an integral clutch. Linear drive shaft shall be self lubricating by means of
integral oiler located in the travel block.
2. Master Control shall be 16 bit microprocessor controller with dual on-board seven-segment alphanumeric
diagnostic display and position encoder. The encoder shall monitor revolutions of the operator shaft and send
signals to microprocessor controller to define door position and speed. The control shall have minimum of 28
programmable parameters including the following functions as required by ANSI A156.10:
a. Adjustable opening and closing speeds.
b. Adjustable back-check and latching.
c. Adjustable braking.
d. Adjustable hold-open time between 1 to 30 seconds.
e. Adjustable Reversing Circuit will reopen door unit if closing path is obstructed.
f. Separate day and night modes of operation with security over-ride.
3. Finger Safety: When unit slides open, strike rail of sliding panel will stop short of adjacent sidelite; resulting
opening is net slide.
4. On/Off Switch shall be supplied. When switched OFF, unit reverts to free manual operation (likewise during
electrical power failure).
C. SECURITY OPTIONS:
1. Manual lock: Manufacturer standard C463 internal thumb turn with external C455 cylinder. Provide additional
C454 hookbolt.
D. PROFILER® HEADER: Shall be slim 4" (102mm) deep by 6" (152mm) high aluminum construction with
extruded z-profile reinforcement for dead load and lateral strength. Header shall have removable face plate for
service and adjustment of operator and controls. Header mounts flush to 4” framing jambs.
1. Type 410 units will require 6” x 6” header.
2. SpaceSaver™ headers shall be combined depth of 8” (203mm) with removable face plate for each.
E. CARRIER ASSEMBLIES AND HEADER ROLLER TRACK: Carrier assemblies shall support door panels with
minimum four rollers per panel. Rollers will be steel, high quality ball bearing wheels 1-1/4" (32 mm) diameter.
Anti-Derailing shall be accomplished by means of a continuous aluminum extrusion full length of slide panel
travel. Overhead header roller track shall be continuous aluminum, nylon covered, and replaceable.
F. SLIDING PANEL(S) AND SIDELITE(S): Shall be aluminum, 1-3/4" (44 mm) deep with narrow stile rails. An
intermediate, horizontal rail (muntin bar), 2 1/4” (57 mm) wide, shall be furnished for safety and division of glass
(optional on 010 units). Standard bottom rail shall be 4" (102mm) tall. Sliding panels shall have concealed
bottom guides to stabilize slide travel.
1. Weather-stripping to be along perimeter of sliding panel(s) and swing-out sidelite(s). Weatherstripping
material captured in extruded aluminum door panel. Surface applied self-adhesive weatherstripping not
acceptable. Adjustable spring-loaded double astragal weather-stripping at lead edge, double mohair at
interlock rails
2. Standard glazing prep to be for 1/4” (6 mm) glass.
3. Sliding Panel and Sidelite Options shall be:
a. Medium stile construction: 3 3/4” (95mm) wide vertical rails with 6 1/2” (165mm) tall bottom rail. Note:
Medium stile construction will reduce slide opening.
b. Wide stile construction: 5” (127mm) wide vertical rails with 6 1/2” (165mm) tall bottom rail. Note: Wide stile
construction will reduce slide opening.
c. Surface applied push bar 1 1/2” (32mm) wide in lieu of standard muntin bar.
d. Custom horizontal muntins from 1/2” (13mm) to 10” (254mm) wide.
e. Custom bottom rails up to 10” (254mm) tall.
f. Additional and/or extra wide sidelites of size and type indicated.
g. Recessed sidelite and track and non-threshold application.
h. Prep for glazing 5/16" (16mm) to 1" (25mm).
G. BREAKOUT PANELS: Slide-swing panels can swing out 90° from any position of slide movement and require
no more than 50 lbf. (222 N) of force applied at the lock stile to open. Slide-swing panels and swing-out sidelites
shall utilize spring loaded ball detent.
1. Slide-swing panels and swing-out sidelites shall have torsion spring designed to re-close panel if pushed
open in the direction of egress.
2. Breakout mechanism shall provide support across full width of the door, in normal operating mode. In
breakout mode, torsion assembly shall support weight of the door to minimize drop during emergency egress.
3. Slide-swing panels shall include intermediate horizontal rail.
084229.23-3
084229.23
4. Units with breakout feature are UL listed as an exit away and are compliant with NFPA 101.
H. JAMBS/FRAME: Shall be aluminum. Jamb dimensions to be:
1. 1 3/4" (44mm) deep by 4" (102mm) wide for Types 010, 110, & 310. Optional jambs include:
a. 1 3/4" (44mm) deep by 4 1/2" (114mm) wide.
b. 1 3/4" (44mm) deep by 6" (152mm) wide. Maximum height: 8’-8”.
b. 2" (51mm) deep by 6" (152mm) wide. Maximum height: 8’-8”.
c. 4" (102mm) square. Maximum height: 8’-8”.
2. 1 3/4" (44mm) deep by 6" (152mm) wide for Type 410.
3. 1 3/4" (44mm) deep by 8" (152mm) wide for SpaceSaver™.
4. Frame Option: Transom of size and type indicated, mounted on header
I. THRESHOLD: Shall be aluminum, 1/2" (25 mm) tall by 4” (102 mm) wide. Optional 7” (178 mm) wide.
A6.5
J. HARDWARE: ANSI A156.5, Grade 1, 2-Point Locking provided and installed in strike rail shall include:
1. Hookbolt Latch, 5/8” laminated stainless steel, latching into jamb or adjacent strike rail.
2. 3/8” hex-bolt into breakout carrier frame.
3. Keyed 1 5/32" (29 mm) Cylinder mounted on exterior side with 31/32" (25 mm) backset
4. Thumbturn mounted on interior side.
5. Hardware Options:
a. 3-Point locking for biparting doors
a. Flush Panic Exit Device recessed in 6 ½” muntin bar for door types 110 and 310.
b. Surface mounted Panic Exit Device for door type 310.
b. Lock Position Indicator.
c. Cylinder Guard.
d. Cylinder Escutcheon.
2.03 RELATED EQUIPMENT
BASIC SENSOR SYSTEM: Shall be 24 VDC, class ll circuit and shall be adjusted and installed in compliance with
ANSI A156.10. System shall include the following:
A. ACTIVATION SENSORS: Microwave or active infrared sensor shall be header-mounted each side of door unit
for detection of traffic from each direction.
B. THRESHOLD PRESENCE SENSORS:
1. Header mounted sensors shall provide active infrared presence detection on each side of the door unit and
shall remain active throughout the entire door opening and closing cycle.
2. Hold-open beams: Two pulsed infrared photoelectric beams to be mounted in vertical rails of sidelite or in
jambs. Sender/receiver arrangement parallels door opening.
2.04 RELATED WORK REQUIREMENTS
A. ELECTRICAL: 120 VAC, 50/60 cycle, single phase, dedicated 20 amp circuit per operator. Non-North American
voltages can be 240 VAC 50/60 cycle (operator must have 240 volt power supply).
B. GLASS AND GLAZING: Glass stops, glazing vinyl and setting blocks for field glazing as per Safety Glazing
standard ANSI Z97.1.2. Contractor to coordinate acquisition of glass in thickness and type in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations for prescribed design.
2.05 MATERIALS, FINISHES AND FABRICATION
A. EXTRUDED ALUMINUM: ASTM B221, 6063-T5 alloy and temper, anodized:
1. Structural Header Sections: Minimum 3/16" (5 mm) thickness.
2. Structural Frame Sections: Minimum 1/8" (3 mm) thickness.
3. Structural Panel Sections: Commercial grade.
B. FINISHES (for all exposed aluminum surfaces): Shall be one of the following:
1. 204-R1 Clear: Arch. Class 2 Clear Anodized Coating, AA-MI2C22A31.
2. 313-R1 Dark Bronze: Arch. Class 1 Anodized Coating, AA-MI2C22A44.
3. 312-R1 Medium Bronze: Arch. Class 1 Anodized Coating, AA-MI2C22A44.
4. 311-R1 Light Bronze: Arch. Class 1 Anodized Coating, AA-MI2C22A44.
5. Champagne: Arch. Class 1 Anodized Coating, AA-MI2C22A44.
A6.6
6. Gold: Arch. Class 1 Anodized Coating, AA-MI2C22A44.
7. Paint Coating:
a. Powder Coat: 100% V.O.C. free fluoropolymer resin-based. Standard and custom colors available
including wood grain finish.
b. Wet Paint: Standard and custom colors available.
8. Clad with stainless steel or muntz metal (brass alloy): #7 mirror finish or #4 brushed finish.
C. PANEL CONSTRUCTION:
1. Corner block type with 3/16” steel backup plate construction, mechanically secured with minimum of four
hardened steel screws. Sash consists of snap-in glass stops, snap-in glazing beads and vinyl gaskets.
084229.23-4
084229.23
2. Slide-swing doors to be supplied with adjustable glass setting block to allow for adjusting of door to meet site
conditions eliminating the need for additional shims.
D. FRAME CONSTRUCTION: Butt joints, mechanically secured with screws and formed alum. corner brackets.
E. OPERATOR CONSTRUCTION: Electromechanical, modular type construction.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
SITE VERIFICATION OF CONDITIONS: Installer must verify that base conditions previously installed under other
sections are acceptable for product installation according to with manufacturer's instructions. Notify the Contractor
in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of work. Do not start work until all negative
conditions are corrected in a manner acceptable to the installer and manufacturer.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. GENERAL: Installer shall be factory trained, certified by AAADM, and experienced to perform work of this
section. Install door units plumb, level and true to line, without warp or rack of frames or sash with
manufacturer's prescribed tolerances. Provide support and anchor in place.
B. DISSIMILAR MATERIALS: Comply with AAMA 101, Appendix Dissimilar Materials by separating aluminum
materials and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action contact points.
C. WEATHER-TIGHT CONSTRUCTION: Install header and framing members in a bed of sealant or with joint filler
or gaskets. Coordinate installation with wall flashings and other components of construction.
D. ELECTRICAL: General or electrical contractor to install all wiring to operator on a separate circuit breaker routed
into header. General or electrical contractor also to install all necessary power and low voltage wiring for proper
operation of associated security systems.
3.03 CLEANING, ADJUSTMENT AND PROTECTION
A. CLEANING: After installation, installer to take following steps:
1. Remove temporary coverings and protection of adjacent work areas.
2. Remove construction debris from construction site and legally dispose of debris.
3. Repair or replace damaged installed products.
4. Clean product surfaces and lubricate operating equipment for optimum condition and safety.
B. ADJUSTMENT: AAADM certified technician to inspect and adjust installation. Comply with ANSI A156.10.
C. ADVISE CONTRACTOR: Of precautions required through the remainder of the construction period, to ensure
that doors will be without damage or deterioration (other than normal weathering) at the time of acceptance.
Note: Horton Automatics reserves the right to make product improvements and change specifications without notice.
END OF SECTION
084229.23-5
085113
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
SECTION 085113 - ALUMINUM WINDOWS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
This Section includes interior fixed aluminum-framed windows.
A.
General: Provide aluminum windows capable of complying with performance requirements
indicated, based on testing manufacturer's windows that are representative of those specified,
and that are of minimum test size required by AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS.
B.
Thermal Movements: Provide aluminum windows, including anchorage, that allow for thermal
movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface
temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of
joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering
calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky
heat loss.
1.
1.3
Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F material surfaces .
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of aluminum window indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, hardware, attachments to other
work, operational clearances, and installation details
C.
Samples: For each exposed finish.
D.
Product Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
E.
Field quality-control test reports.
F.
G.
Maintenance data.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer: A qualified installer, approved by manufacturer to install manufacturer's products.
B.
Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass manufacturers and
with GANA's "Glazing Manual" unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
085113-1
085113
1.5
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace aluminum windows that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty
period.
1.
Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
Failure to meet performance requirements.
Structural failures including excessive deflection, water leakage, air infiltration, or
condensation.
Faulty operation of movable sash and hardware.
Deterioration of metals, other materials, and metal finishes beyond normal
weathering.
Failure of insulating glass.
Warranty Period:
a.
b.
c.
Window: Three years from date of Substantial Completion.
Glazing: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
Metal Finish: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
B.
Manufacturers:
following:
C.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product
indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
All Seasons Windows & Doors; All Seasons Commercial Division, Inc.
Boyd Aluminum Manufacturing.
Custom Window Company.
DeSCo Windows.
EFCO Corporation.
EXTECH Exterior Technologies, Inc.
Fleetwood Aluminum Products, Inc.
Gerkin Windows and Doors.
Graham Architectural Products Corp.
Kawneer; an Alcoa Company.
Mannix; a division of Interstate Window Corp.
Peerless Products Inc.
Thermal Windows, Inc.
TRACO.
Wausau Window and Wall Systems.
Winco Window Company.
Window Technologies, Inc.; Century Manufacturing, Inc.
YKK AP America Inc.
085113-2
085113
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
19.
20.
2.2
Manko Window Systems Inc.
C.R. Laurence, Inc.
WINDOW 3-6
A.
Window Type:
1.
2.3
Fixed
.
Performance Class and Grade: LC25 .
GLAZING
A.
Glass and Glazing Materials: Refer to Division 08 Section "Glazing" for glass units and glazing
requirements applicable to glazed aluminum window units.
B.
Glass G3: 1/4” Tempered complying with Division 08 Section "Glazing."
C.
Glass G4: 3/16” Tempered Privacy Glass (w/ reflective side facing retail)
D.
Glass G5: 3/8” Tempered complying with Division 08 Section "Glazing."
2.4
FABRICATION
A.
2.5
Fabricate aluminum windows that are re-glazable without dismantling sash or ventilator framing.
ALUMINUM FINISHES
A.
Aluminum Anodic Finish: Class I, anodic coating complying with AAMA. Color per drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with Drawings, Shop Drawings, and manufacturer's written instructions for installing
windows, hardware, accessories, and other components.
B.
Install windows level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding thermal
movement, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall
flashing and other adjacent construction.
C.
Set sill members in bed of sealant..
D.
Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic
action at points of contact with other materials.
E.
Clean aluminum surfaces immediately after installing windows. Avoid damaging protective
coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances.
085113-3
085113
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
F.
Clean factory-glazed glass immediately after installing windows. Comply with manufacturer's
written recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance. Remove nonpermanent labels,
and clean surfaces.
G.
Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged
during construction period.
H.
Install frame in a manner that allows the glazing to be replaced from the inside of the highest
nd
applicaple level. Ensure that 2 story interior glazing can not fall onto ground floor below.
085113-4
088000
GLAZING
SECTION 088000 - GLAZING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified in
other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.2
Windows.
Doors.
Storefront framing.
Glazed entrances.
A.
Delegated Design: Design glass, including comprehensive engineering analysis according to
ASTM E 1300 by a qualified professional engineer, using the following design criteria:
1.
2.
1.3
Design Wind Pressures: As indicated on Drawings.
Vertical Glazing: For glass surfaces sloped 15 degrees or less from vertical, design glass
to resist design wind pressure based on glass type factors for short-duration load.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated.
B.
Glass Samples: For each type of glass product other than clear monolithic vision glass; 12
inches square.
C.
Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use
same designations indicated on Drawings.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers
and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these
publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.
1.
IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North American Glazing
Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use."
B.
Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing labeling is indicated, permanently mark glazing
with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction or the manufacturer. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass,
thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies.
C.
Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least
one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of IGCC.
088000-1
088000
1.5
GLAZING
WARRANTY
A.
Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer's standard form in
which coated-glass manufacturer agrees to replace coated-glass units that deteriorate within
specified warranty period. Deterioration of coated glass is defined as defects developed from
normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning coated glass
contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other
indications of deterioration in coating.
1.
B.
Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Insulating Glass: Manufacturer's standard form in which
insulating-glass manufacturer agrees to replace insulating-glass units that deteriorate within
specified warranty period. Deterioration of insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal
under normal use that is not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning
insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the
obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass.
1.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GLASS PRODUCTS
A.
All glass to be tempered.
B.
All storefront glass to have a minimum U-value of 0.38 and SHGC of 0.40
C.
Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Quality-Q3, Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
D.
Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I; Quality-Q3; Class I (clear) unless otherwise
indicated; of kind and condition indicated.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
E.
AFG Industries, Inc.; Krystal Klear.
Guardian Industries Corp.; Ultrawhite.
Pilkington North America; Optiwhite.
PPG Industries, Inc.; Starphire.
AFG Industries, Inc.; Spotless Ti.
Cardinal Glass Industries; LoE2 Plus.
Pilkington North America; Activ.
PPG Industries, Inc.; SunClean.
Reflective-Coated Vision Glass: ASTM C 1376, coated by pyrolytic process or vacuum
deposition (sputter-coating) process, and complying with other requirements specified.
1.
Coating Color: Pewter .
088000-2
088000
GLAZING
2.
3.
2.2
Glass: per manufacturer.
Tint Color:
Gray .
INSULATING GLASS
A.
Insulating-Glass Units: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by
a dehydrated interspace, qualified according to ASTM E 2190, and complying with other
requirements specified.
1.
2.
3.
2.3
Sealing System: Dual seal.
Spacer: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction.
Color: As noted in the drawings.
GLAZING GASKETS
A.
Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of profile and hardness required to
maintain watertight seal, made from one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or molded, closed-cell, integral-skinned EPDM silicone
or thermoplastic polyolefin rubber gaskets complying with ASTM C 509, Type II, black; of profile
and hardness required to maintain watertight seal.
1.
2.4
EPDM complying with ASTM C 864.
Silicone complying with ASTM C 1115.
Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber complying with ASTM C 1115.
Application: Use where soft compression gaskets will be compressed by inserting dense
compression gaskets on opposite side of glazing or pressure applied by means of
pressure-glazing stops on opposite side of glazing.
GLAZING SEALANTS
A.
General:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.5
Compatibility: Provide glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with
other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units,
and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as
demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for
selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at
time of installation.
VOC Content: For sealants used inside of the weatherproofing system, not more than
250 g/L when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D.
Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full
range.
GLAZING TAPES
A.
Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based, 100 percent solids elastomeric
tape; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer
088000-3
088000
GLAZING
rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; and
complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed-cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive
on both surfaces; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types:
1.
2.
2.6
AAMA 804.3 tape, where indicated.
AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous
pressure.
AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous
pressure.
AAMA 810.1, Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant.
AAMA 810.1, Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with a
full bead of liquid sealant.
MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS
A.
Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.
B.
Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or
minus 5.
C.
Spacers:
Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass
manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.
D.
Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side
walking).
E.
Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and
density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant
performance.
F.
Perimeter Insulation for Fire-Resistive Glazing: Product that is approved by testing agency that
listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing product with which it is used for application and fireprotection rating indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
GLAZING, GENERAL
A.
Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and
other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in
referenced glazing publications.
B.
Adjust glazing channel dimensions as required by Project conditions during installation to
provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant
thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.
C.
Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass
from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge
088000-4
088000
GLAZING
damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair
performance and appearance.
D.
Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by
preconstruction testing.
E.
Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing
publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of
compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.
F.
Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.
G.
Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches.
H.
Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways
in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to
requirements in referenced glazing publications.
3.2
TAPE GLAZING
A.
Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush
with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops.
B.
Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to
make them fit opening.
C.
Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Cover
horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills.
D.
Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped.
Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.
E.
Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense
compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops.
Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.
F.
Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape.
3.3
GASKET GLAZING (DRY)
A.
Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings
exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation.
B.
Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place
with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.
C.
Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and
press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed
and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at
corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight
seal without developing bending stresses in glass.
Seal gasket joints with sealant
recommended by gasket manufacturer.
088000-5
088000
GLAZING
D.
Installation with Pressure-Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and
press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressureglazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to
produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints
with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.
E.
Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.
3.4
SEALANT GLAZING (WET)
A.
Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass
lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding
into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers
and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge
clearance for optimum sealant performance.
B.
Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond
of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.
C.
Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.
3.5
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed
streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove
nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.
B.
Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction
operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with
glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.
C.
Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at
frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum,
alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.
D.
Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from
natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period.
088000-6
092216
SECTION 092216 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
1.2
Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior gypsum board assemblies.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics:
tested according to ASTM E 119.
B.
STC-Rated Assemblies: Provide materials and construction identical to those tested in
assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413.
2.2
Provide materials and construction identical to those
FRAMING SYSTEMS
A.
Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. Use either steel studs and runners or dimpled steel
studs and runners of equivalent minimum base-metal thickness.
1.
2.
B.
Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.018 inch .
Depth: As indicated on Drawings .
Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide one of the following in thickness not less than
indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs:
1.
2.
3.
Single Long-Leg Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2-inch- deep flanges,
installed with studs friction fit into top runner and with continuous bridging located within
12 inches of the top of studs to provide lateral bracing.
Double-Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runners, inside runner with 2-inch- deep
flanges and fastened to studs, and outer runner sized to friction fit inside runner.
Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes
due to deflection of structure above.
a.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following :
1)
2)
3)
Dietrich Metal Framing; SLP-TRK Slotted Deflection Track.
MBA Building Supplies; FlatSteel Deflection Track Slotted Deflecto Track.
Steel Network Inc. (The); VertiClip SLD VertiTrack VTD Series.
092216-1
092216
4)
5)
C.
Flat Strap and Backing Plate:
indicated.
1.
D.
3.
2.3
Configuration: Asymmetrical .
Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 0.053-inch uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inchwide flanges.
1.
2.
H.
Depth: 1-1/2 inches .
Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches, 0.068-inch- thick, galvanized steel.
Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound
transmission.
1.
G.
Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.
1.
2.
F.
Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width
Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: Steel, 0.053-inch minimum base-metal thickness, with minimum
1/2-inchwide flanges.
1.
2.
E.
Superior Metal Trim; Superior Flex Track System (SFT).
Telling Industries; Vertical Slip Track Vertical Slip Track II.
Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with minimum
uncoated-steel thickness of 0.033 inch.
Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inchdiameter
wire, or double strand of 0.048-inchdiameter wire.
Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of Insert depth, wall attachment
flange of 7/8 inch, minimum uncoated-metal thickness of 0.018 inch, and depth required to fit
insulation thickness indicated.
AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A.
Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and
other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.
B.
Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provideasphalt saturated organic felt or foam gasket.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
Installation Standard: ASTM C 754.
1.
Gypsum Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 841 that apply
to framing installation.
092216-2
092216
2.
3.
4.
Portland Cement Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 1063
that apply to framing installation.
Gypsum Veneer Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 844 that
apply to framing installation.
Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to
framing installation.
B.
Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim,
grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.
C.
Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.
D.
Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing
members. Frame both sides of joints independently.
3.2
INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES
A.
Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than
spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.
B.
Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior
walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.
C.
Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.
D.
Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural
supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to
terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above
ceiling.
1.
2.
Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to
produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished
assemblies.
Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames;
install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.
a.
b.
c.
3.
4.
Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as
required for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of
openings to match framing required above door heads.
Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated
assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to
underside of solid structure.
a.
5.
Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated.
Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch
clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished
assembly.
Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of
overhead structure.
Firestop Track: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire-resistancerated assembly indicated.
Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated.
092216-3
092216
6.
Curved Partitions:
a.
b.
E.
Bend track to uniform curve and locate straight lengths so they are tangent to arcs.
Begin and end each arc with a stud, and space intermediate studs equally along
arcs. On straight lengths of no fewer than two studs at ends of arcs, place studs 6
inches o.c.
Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than
1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.
092216-4
092400
ONE COAT STUCCO
SECTION 092400 –ONE COAT STUCCO
Part 1 - General
1.01
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes: Installation of the Portland cement stucco as an exterior wall cladding.
The extent of stucco base and finish coat assembly is as indicated on the drawings. This
system is to be mechanically attached over rigid insulation and sheathing into the studs,
CMU and ICF.
B.
The types of stucco base coat assembly include:
1. Factory blended, fiber-reinforced cement plaster basecoat for jobsite mixing to
provide brown coats to receive secondary fiberglass crack suppression reinforcement
and an acrylic based colored stucco finish.
C.
Products installed but not supplied under this section:
1. Joint Sealant: Refer to Division 7 Joint Treatment (Sealants) Section. Installation of
joint sealant shall be by coating applicator or a separate installer. Joint sealant
installer shall be experienced and competent in the installation of elastomeric
construction sealants.
1.02
DESCRIPTION
A.
Brown Coat Concentrate fiber reinforced stucco that is a factory blended formulation of
Portland cement, lime, fibers and proprietary ingredients. For use with jobsite added
ASTM C-897 stucco sand and clean potable water. Current ICC-ES Report Required
B.
Brown Coat Functional Criteria:
1. Stucco application shall be sloped a minimum of 4”/12” (15˚) for positive drainage.
2. Substrate conditions:
a. Sheathing substrates shall be sound, dry and free of dust, dirt, and other
contaminants.
b. Substrate Dimensional Tolerances: Flat with ¼ inch (6.4 mm) within any 4 foot
(1219 mm) radius to maintain a uniform thickness of basecoat material.
c. Maximum deflection of substrate assembly under positive or negative design
loads shall not exceed L/360 of span.
C.
Expansion Joints:
1. Continuous expansion joints shall be installed at all areas of dissimilar materials,
multiple story plate lines or existing engineered through wall expansion joints.
2. Per ASTM C 1063, “Expansion and or contraction joints shall be installed in walls not
more than 144 ft2 (13.4 m2) in area and not more than areas of 100 ft2 (9.30 m2) for
all horizontal applications. The distance between joints shall not exceed 18 ft (5.5m)
in either direction or a length-to-width ratio of 2-1/2 to 1.”
3. Location and frequency of control joints to be detailed by the design professional and
shown on drawings when applicable.
4. Align joints with exterior penetrations and corners
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Applicator to submit:
1. Manufacturer’s technical information including installation instructions and
recommendations.
2. Samples: Submit samples for approval. Samples shall be of materials specified and
of suitable size as required to accurately represent each color and texture to be used
on project. Prepare each sample using same tools and techniques for actual project
application. Approved samples shall be maintained and available at job site.
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: Install stucco basecoat assembly to comply with
all applicable codes and standards and with requirements of local agencies having
jurisdiction.
B.
Manufacturer: Shall have marketed stucco products in United States for at least ten
years; shall have completed projects of same building size and type as this project.
C.
Applicator Qualifications: Applicators specializing in the installation of exterior stucco
assembly with a minimum of 5 years experience in work similar to that required by this
section.
092400-1
092400
ONE COAT STUCCO
D.
Single Source Responsibility: All stucco base coat and finish materials shall be from a
single manufacturing source.
E.
Surface Deviation: Shall not be more then ¼” in 10’ when utilizing a straight edge placed
anywhere on the wall(s)
1.05
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver manufactured materials in original packages or containers, with manufacturer’s
labels intact and legible.
B.
Keep materials dry, above freezing, stored off ground, under cover and away from damp
surfaces. At the time they are mixed, all materials shall be at a minimum temperature of
40˚F (4˚C).
C.
Remove wet, frozen, damaged or detrimental materials from site immediately.
1.06
PROJECT SITE AND INSTALLATION CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Conditions: Comply with manufacturer’s recommendations of
environmental conditions affecting product installation requirements.
1. Installation Ambient Air Temperature: Minimum of 40ºF (4ºC) and rising, and remain
so for 48 hours thereafter. Maximum Ambient Air Temperature of 120˚F (49˚C).
Protect stucco from uneven and excessive evaporation during hot, dry weather.
2. Do not use frozen materials in cement stucco.
3. Do not apply cement stucco to frozen surfaces or surfaces containing frost or ice.
4. Inclement Weather: Do not apply basecoat during inclement weather, unless
appropriate protection is employed.
5. Wall and Substrate Temperatures: Avoid, when possible, installation of the basecoat
and the finish coats over substrates that are over 120˚F (49˚C).
B.
Protection:
1. Protect adjacent finished surfaces prior to stuccoing.
2. Maintain protection in place until completion of work.
3. Protect finished work when stopping for the day or when completing an area.
Part 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Specification Base and Basis of Design: Parex: 1870 Stone Mountain Road, Lithonia Rd,
Georgia, 30058 (770) 482-7872. Contact [email protected] 505-338-4433
direct
B.
El Rey Stucco, 4100 Broadway SE, Albuquerque New Mexico, 87105 (505) 873-1180
C.
TEIFS: 220 Burleson, San Antonio Texas, 78202, 800-358-4785.
D.
Or approved equal
2.02 MATERIALS
A.
B.
Expanded Polystyrene: As detailed on drawings and insulation specification
Water Resistive Barrier:
a. Fluid Applied Air and Water Barrier: Weather Seal, by Parex, A roll, blush, spray or
trowel applied seamless water resistive and air barrier.
-Orb. Sheet good Water Resistive Barrier: Grade D, 15lb minimum asphalt saturated Kraft
paper or equal. Two layers as required by code over wood based sheathings.
C. Lath and Trim Accessories: Conform to ASTM C1063 lathing and furring.
1. Exterior components field walls: Minimum 3.4lb expanded metal self furred to lath to
be used in accordance with ASTM C897.
2. Terminations: J-Metal or Stucco stop, general purpose type with expanded or
perforated flanges. Plaster stops to be utilized around all through wall penetrations
with gaps between the back of the plaster stops and the window or door frames wide
enough to installed backer rod and sealant. See manufactures publish details.
3. Corner Reinforcement: (galvanized welded wire, minimum 18 gage): Manufacturer’s
standard pre-formed corner reinforcement made from 1.7 lbs. (0.059 kg/m2) per
square yard of diamond mesh lath.
4. Square Edge Corner Beads: expanded or flanged to suit application. (For square
092400-2
092400
ONE COAT STUCCO
corners).
5. Round-Edged Corner Beads: expanded or flanged to suit application. (For rounded
corners).
6. Control Joints: Single component control joints with ¼ inch slots and ¾ inch grounds,
or equal.
7. Expansion Joints: two piece adjustable expansion joints, free floating adjustments
from ¼ inch to 5/8 inch.
8. Weep Screeds: foundation weep screed, with perforations and minimum 3-1/2 inch
vertical attachment flange.
9. Fasteners: steel nail or screw of furring type with 1 inch cap of sufficient length for
minimum ½ inch penetration into brick, block, concrete or stud system.
10. 3.4lb. per square yard expanded metal strip-lath 4 inches wide to be used at
around all windows, doorways, openings and through wall penetrations.
11. 3.4lb density expanded metal lath for use on all soffits and overhangs as shown on
drawings.
D. Fiber-reinforced Portland cement stucco basecoat: (The following stucco specification was
written around Parex’s factory-blended Amourwall 100® brown basecoat assembly.
Therefore, all substitution requests must be proven to be of equal quality no less than ten
(10) days prior to project bid date.
1. Amourwall 100® Concentrate: Manufacturer’s standard factory formulated,
concentrate scratch and brown stucco basecoats consisting of Portland cement, lime,
fibers, and proprietary ingredients
E. Fiberglass mesh for increased crack suppression: Krak-Master mesh as manufactured by
Parex USA for embedment into the surface of the brown coat for increased crack suppresion
F. Water: Potable
G. Sand: Comply with all requirements of ASTM C 897
H. Primer and Surface Conditioner: Consisting of acrylic polymers and design for use over fully
cured brown coats prior to the application of acrylic finish coats. To be tinted to the finish coat
color, prior to the application of the finish coat.
a. Parex Tintable primer: Consisting of acrylic polymers and design for use over fully
cured brown coats prior to the application of acrylic finish coats. To be tinted to the
finish coat color, prior to the application of the finish coat.
I. Finish coat, Acrylic Based Tinted Stucco Finish:
a. Parex Lastic®: Aquasol Elastomeric Acrylic based stucco finish coat, consisting of
Acrylic Polymers, properly graded aggregate, colorant and proprietary ingredients.
b. Texture as selected from manufacturer’s full range
c. Integral Color as incated on the drawings to match the paint color
Part 3 - Execution
3.01
INSTRUCTIONS
A.
Compliance: Comply with manufacturer’s instructions for installation of base and finish
coats
3.02
INSPECTION
A.
Substrate Examination: Examine prior to stucco installation as follows:
1. Substrate shall be of a type listed in IBC 2009 or as required by local codes and
agency’s having jurisdiction. Wood based sheathings substrates must be gapped 1/8
inch (3 mm) between panels.
2. Substrate shall be examined for soundness, and/or other harmful conditions.
3. Substrate shall be free of dust, dirt, efflorescence, and other harmful contaminants.
4. Notify contractor of discrepancies preventing installation of the stucco assembly.
B. Install fluid applied weather resistive barrier, sheet good barrier and flashing system in
compliance with requirements of applicable codes, regulations, and agencies having
jurisdiction.
C. Install lath tight utilizing approved fasteners, properly secured, and that all accessories are
D. Isolation: Where lath and metal support assembly abuts building structure horizontally, and
where partition wall work abuts the overhead structure, isolate work from structure
092400-3
092400
ONE COAT STUCCO
movements. Install expansion or control joints to absorb deflections but maintain lateral
support. Frame both sides of expansion and control joints separately and do not bridge joints
with furring or lath.
E. Examine substrates, grounds and accessories to insure that finished stucco work will be true
to line, plane, level and plumb.
3.03
PREPARATION OVER MASONRY SUBSTRATES: DIRECT BOND APPLICATIONS
A.
Conform to preparation requirements of ASTM C926.
B.
Verify that masonry and concrete surfaces to receive direct bond applications of stucco
basecoats are rough, free from form release agents or otherwise properly prepared to
provide for adequate bond.
C.
Apply a uniform coating of the acrylic bonding agent in accordance with manufacturer’s
recommendations and instructions.
3.04
INSTALLATION
A. General: Apply stucco basecoat assembly in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and
recommendations as written in manufacturers data sheets, and in compliance with
requirements of applicable codes, regulations and agencies having jurisdiction.
B. Install polystyrene utilizing an acrylic modified adhesive similar to those used for EIFS.
C. Lathing: Install according to ASTM 1063 and install into block, brick or concrete and or stud
assemblies a minimum of 1 inch.
C. Interrupt stucco application only at junctions of stucco planes, at openings, at control joints or
at expansion joints.
D. Basecoat:
1. Apply Brown coat directly over lathing to a thickness of 3/8 inch (9.5mm), using
sufficient trowel pressure or spray velocity to key brown coat into lath
4. Darby, then rod surface to true plane.
5. While basecoat is still wet, embed secondary fiberglass reinforcement utilizing a
wood float, and smooth to flush. Take care to completely embed mesh not more than
1/32 inch into surface of wet brown coat. Overlap all seams 2 inches and remove all
wrinkles, rough edges etc.
6. Float or lightly broom surface to provide bond with cement stucco finish coat, or
trowel smooth in preparation for acrylic finish coat.
7. Tool brown coat to provide a V-joint at intersection of stucco with frames or other
items of metal, wood, or plastic which act as stucco grounds.
E. Finish Coat: Acrylic Based Stucco Finish
1. Apply primer coats to fully cured basecoats, allow to dry until tacky.
2. Apply exterior wall finish coat to thickness recommended by manufacturer to achieve
texture indicated, using sufficient trowel pressure or spray velocity to bond finish coat
to basecoat.
3. Apply exterior wall finish in number of coats and consistency required to achieve
texture to match approved sample.
3.05
CURING
A. Moist cure cement base coats with a fog spray of clear water with sufficiently frequent
applications to maintain stucco uniformly moist for a minimum of 48 hours following
applications. Allow an additional 5 days of air curing before the application of any primers or
finish coats.
B. Air Cure acrylic finish coats only, do not wet cure.
3.06
CLEANING
A. Patching:
1. Repair damaged exterior wall finish coat to match surrounding finish.
B. Cleanup:
1. Remove excess finish and protective materials from adjacent surfaces.
2. Remove all excess materials from the project site.
End of Section 092400 Single Coat Stucco
092400-4
092423
THREE COAT STUCCO
SECTION 092423 –THREE COAT STUCCO
Part 1 - General
1.01
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes: Installation of the Portland cement stucco as an exterior wall cladding.
The extent of stucco base and finish coat assembly is as indicated on the drawings. This
system is to be mechanically attached over rigid insulation and sheathing into the studs,
CMU and ICF.
B.
The types of stucco base coat assembly include:
1. Factory blended, fiber-reinforced cement plaster basecoat for jobsite mixing to
provide scratch and brown coats to receive secondary fiberglass crack suppression
reinforcement and an acrylic based colored stucco finish.
C.
Products installed but not supplied under this section:
1. Joint Sealant: Refer to Division 7 Joint Treatment (Sealants) Section. Installation of
joint sealant shall be by coating applicator or a separate installer. Joint sealant
installer shall be experienced and competent in the installation of elastomeric
construction sealants.
1.02
DESCRIPTION
A.
Scratch and Brown Concentrate fiber reinforced stucco that is a factory blended
formulation of Portland cement, lime, fibers and proprietary ingredients. For use with
jobsite added ASTM C-897 stucco sand and clean potable water.
B.
Scratch and Brown Functional Criteria:
1. Stucco application shall be sloped a minimum of 4”/12” (15•) for positive drainage.
2. Substrate conditions:
a. Sheathing substrates shall be sound, dry and free of dust, dirt, and other
contaminants.
b. Substrate Dimensional Tolerances: Flat with ¼ inch (6.4 mm) within any 4 foot
(1219 mm) radius to maintain a uniform thickness of basecoat material.
c. Maximum deflection of substrate assembly under positive or negative design
loads shall not exceed L/360 of span.
C.
Expansion Joints:
1. Continuous expansion joints shall be installed at all areas of dissimilar materials,
multiple story plate lines or existing engineered through wall expansion joints.
2. Per ASTM C 1063, “Expansion and or contraction joints shall be installed in walls not
more than 144 ft2 (13.4 m2) in area and not more than areas of 100 ft2 (9.30 m2) for
all horizontal applications. The distance between joints shall not exceed 18 ft (5.5m)
in either direction or a length-to-width ratio of 2-1/2 to 1.”
3. Location and frequency of control joints to be detailed by the design professional and
shown on drawings when applicable.
4. Align joints with exterior penetrations and corners
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Applicator to submit:
1. Manufacturer’s technical information including installation instructions and
recommendations.
2. Samples: Submit samples for approval. Samples shall be of materials specified and
of suitable size as required to accurately represent each color and texture to be used
on project. Prepare each sample using same tools and techniques for actual project
application. Approved samples shall be maintained and available at job site.
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: Install stucco basecoat assembly to comply with
all applicable codes and standards and with requirements of local agencies having
jurisdiction.
B.
Manufacturer: Shall have marketed stucco products in United States for at least ten
years; shall have completed projects of same building size and type as this project.
C.
Applicator Qualifications: Applicators specializing in the installation of exterior stucco
assembly with a minimum of 5 years experience in work similar to that required by this
section.
092423-1
092423
THREE COAT STUCCO
D.
Single Source Responsibility: All stucco base coat and finish materials shall be from a
single manufacturing source.
E.
Surface Deviation: Shall not be more then ¼” in 10’ when utilizing a straight edge placed
anywhere on the wall(s)
1.05
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver manufactured materials in original packages or containers, with manufacturer’s
labels intact and legible.
B.
Keep materials dry, above freezing, stored off ground, under cover and away from damp
surfaces. At the time they are mixed, all materials shall be at a minimum temperature of
40•F (4•C).
C.
Remove wet, frozen, damaged or detrimental materials from site immediately.
1.06
PROJECT SITE AND INSTALLATION CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Conditions: Comply with manufacturer’s recommendations of
environmental conditions affecting product installation requirements.
1. Installation Ambient Air Temperature: Minimum of 40ºF (4ºC) and rising, and remain
so for 48 hours thereafter. Maximum Ambient Air Temperature of 120•F (49•C).
Protect stucco from uneven and excessive evaporation during hot, dry weather.
2. Do not use frozen materials in cement stucco.
3. Do not apply cement stucco to frozen surfaces or surfaces containing frost or ice.
4. Inclement Weather: Do not apply basecoat during inclement weather, unless
appropriate protection is employed.
5. Wall and Substrate Temperatures: Avoid, when possible, installation of the basecoat
and the finish coats over substrates that are over 120•F (49•C).
B.
Protection:
1. Protect adjacent finished surfaces prior to stuccoing.
2. Maintain protection in place until completion of work.
3. Protect finished work when stopping for the day or when completing an area.
Part 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Specification Base and Basis of Design: Parex: 1870 Stone Mountain Road, Lithonia Rd,
Georgia, 30058 (770) 482-7872. Contact [email protected] 505-338-4433
direct
B.
El Rey Stucco, 4100 Broadway SE, Albuquerque New Mexico, 87105 (505) 873-1180
C.
TEIFS: 220 Burleson, San Antonio Texas, 78202, 800-358-4785.
D.
Or approved equal
2.02 MATERIALS
A.
B.
Expanded Polystyrene: As detailed on drawings and insulation specification
Water Resistive Barrier:
1. Fluid Applied Air and Water Barrier: Weather Seal, by Parex, A roll, blush, spray or
trowel applied seamless water resistive and air barrier.
-Or2. Sheet good Water Resistive Barrier: Grade D, 15lb minimum asphalt saturated Kraft
paper or equal. Two layers as required by code over wood based sheathings.
C. Lath and Trim Accessories: Conform to ASTM C1063 lathing and furring.
1. Exterior components field walls: Minimum 3.4lb expanded metal self furred to lath to
be used in accordance with ASTM C897.
2. Terminations: J-Metal or Stucco stop, general purpose type with expanded or
perforated flanges. Plaster stops to be utilized around all through wall penetrations
with gaps between the back of the plaster stops and the window or door frames wide
enough to installed backer rod and sealant. See manufactures publish details.
3. Corner Reinforcement: (galvanized welded wire, minimum 18 gage): Manufacturer’s
standard pre-formed corner reinforcement made from 1.7 lbs. (0.059 kg/m2) per
square yard of diamond mesh lath.
4. Square Edge Corner Beads: expanded or flanged to suit application. (For square
092423-2
092423
THREE COAT STUCCO
corners).
5. Round-Edged Corner Beads: expanded or flanged to suit application. (For rounded
corners).
6. Control Joints: Single component control joints with ¼ inch slots and ¾ inch grounds,
or equal.
7. Expansion Joints: two piece adjustable expansion joints, free floating adjustments
from ¼ inch to 5/8 inch.
8. Weep Screeds: foundation weep screed, with perforations and minimum 3-1/2 inch
vertical attachment flange.
9. Fasteners: steel nail or screw of furring type with 1 inch cap of sufficient length for
minimum ½ inch penetration into brick, block, concrete or stud system.
10. 3.4lb. per square yard expanded metal strip-lath 4 inches wide to be used at
around all windows, doorways, openings and through wall penetrations.
11. 3.4lb density expanded metal lath for use on all soffits and overhangs as shown on
drawings.
D. Fiber-reinforced Portland cement stucco basecoat: (The following stucco specification was
written around Parex’s factory-blended Fiber-47® scratch and brown basecoat assembly.
Therefore, all substitution requests must be proven to be of equal quality no less than ten
(10) days prior to project bid date.
1. Fiber-47® Concentrate: Manufacturer’s standard factory formulated, concentrate
scratch and brown stucco basecoats consisting of Portland cement, lime, fibers, and
proprietary ingredients.
E. Fiberglass mesh for increased crack suppression: Krak-Master mesh as manufactured by
Parex USA for embedment into the surface of the brown coat for increased crack suppresion
F. Water: Potable
G. Sand: Comply with all requirements of ASTM C 897
H. Parex Tintable primer: Consisting of acrylic polymers and design for use over fully cured
brown coats prior to the application of acrylic finish coats. To be tinted to the finish coat color,
prior to the application of the finish coat.
I. Finish coat, Acrylic Based Tinted Stucco Finish:
1. Parex Lastic®: Aquasol Elastomeric Acrylic based stucco finish coat, consisting of
Acrylic Polymers, properly graded aggregate, colorant and proprietary ingredients.
2. Texture as selected from manufacturer’s full range
3. Integral color as incated on the drawings to match the paint color
Part 3 - Execution
3.01
INSTRUCTIONS
A.
Compliance: Comply with manufacturer’s instructions for installation of base and finish
coats
3.02
INSPECTION
A.
Substrate Examination: Examine prior to stucco installation as follows:
1. Substrate shall be of a type listed in IBC 2009 or as required by local codes and
agency’s having jurisdiction. Wood based sheathings substrates must be gapped 1/8
inch (3 mm) between panels.
2. Substrate shall be examined for soundness, and/or other harmful conditions.
3. Substrate shall be free of dust, dirt, efflorescence, and other harmful contaminants.
4. Notify contractor of discrepancies preventing installation of the stucco assembly.
B. Install fluid applied weather resistive barrier, sheet good barrier and flashing system in
compliance with requirements of applicable codes, regulations, and agencies having
jurisdiction.
C. Install lath tight utilizing approved fasteners, properly secured, and that all accessories are
D. Isolation: Where lath and metal support assembly abuts building structure horizontally, and
where partition wall work abuts the overhead structure, isolate work from structure
movements. Install expansion or control joints to absorb deflections but maintain lateral
support. Frame both sides of expansion and control joints separately and do not bridge joints
with furring or lath.
092423-3
092423
3.03
3.04
THREE COAT STUCCO
E. Examine substrates, grounds and accessories to insure that finished stucco work will be true
to line, plane, level and plumb.
PREPARATION OVER MASONRY SUBSTRATES: DIRECT BOND APPLICATIONS
A.
Conform to preparation requirements of ASTM C926.
B.
Verify that masonry and concrete surfaces to receive direct bond applications of stucco
basecoats are rough, free from form release agents or otherwise properly prepared to
provide for adequate bond.
C.
Apply a uniform coating of the acrylic bonding agent in accordance with manufacturer’s
recommendations and instructions.
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Apply stucco basecoat assembly in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions
and recommendations as written in manufacturers data sheets, and in compliance with
requirements of applicable codes, regulations and agencies having jurisdiction.
B.
Install polystyrene utilizing an acrylic modified adhesive similar to those used for EIFS.
C.
Lathing: Install according to ASTM 1063 and install into block, brick or concrete and or
stud assemblies a minimum of 1 inch.
D.
Interrupt stucco application only at junctions of stucco planes, at openings, at control
joints or at expansion joints
D.
Basecoat:
E.
1. Apply scratch coat to a thickness of 3/8 inch using sufficient trowel pressure or spray
velocity to key stucco into lath or onto direct bond substrate.
2. Scratch horizontally and in order to provide for a key with the brown coat.
3. Apply Brown coat directly over scratch coat to a thickness of 3/8 inch (9.5mm), using
sufficient trowel pressure or spray velocity to key brown coat into scratch coat.
4. Darby, then rod surface to true plane.
5. While basecoat is still wet, embed secondary fiberglass reinforcement utilizing a
wood float, and smooth to flush. Take care to completely embed mesh not more than
1/32 inch into surface of wet brown coat. Overlap all seams 2 inches and remove all
wrinkles, rough edges etc.
6. Float or lightly broom surface to provide bond with cement stucco finish coat, or
trowel smooth in preparation for acrylic finish coat.
7. Tool brown coat to provide a V-joint at intersection of stucco with frames or other
items of metal, wood, or plastic which act as stucco grounds.
Finish Coat: Acrylic Based Stucco Finish
1. Apply primer coats to fully cured basecoats, allow to dry until tacky.
2. Apply exterior wall finish coat to thickness recommended by manufacturer to achieve
texture indicated, using sufficient trowel pressure or spray velocity to bond finish coat
to basecoat.
3. Apply exterior wall finish in number of coats and consistency required to achieve
texture to match approved sample.
3.05
CURING
A. Moist cure cement base coats with a fog spray of clear water with sufficiently frequent
applications to maintain stucco uniformly moist for a minimum of 48 hours following
applications. Allow an additional 5 days of air curing before the application of any primers or
finish coats.
B. Air Cure acrylic finish coats only, do not wet cure.
3.06
CLEANING
A. Patching:
1. Repair damaged exterior wall finish coat to match surrounding finish.
B. Cleanup:
1. Remove excess finish and protective materials from adjacent surfaces.
2. Remove all excess materials from the project site.
End of Section 092423 Three Coat Stucco
092423-4
092900
GYPSUM BOARD
SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.
2.
3.
1.2
Interior gypsum board.
Exterior gypsum board for ceilings and soffits.
Tile backing panels.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Samples: For the following products:
1.
2.
1.3
Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12-inch- long length for each trim accessory
indicated.
Textured Finishes: Manufacturer's standard size for each textured finish indicated and
on same backing indicated for Work.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and
construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an
independent testing agency.
B.
Mockups: Before beginning gypsum board installation, install mockups of at least 100 sq. ft. in
surface area to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and
execution.
1.
Install mockups for the following:
a.
b.
2.
3.
4.
Each level of gypsum board finish indicated for use in exposed locations.
Each texture finish indicated.
Apply or install final decoration indicated, including painting and wallcoverings, on
exposed surfaces for review of mockups.
Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of mockups.
Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.
092900-1
092900
GYPSUM BOARD
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A.
General: Complying with ASTM C 36/C 36M or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, as applicable to type
of gypsum board indicated and whichever is more stringent.
B.
Type X:
1.
2.
C.
Ceiling Type: Manufactured to have more sag resistance than regular-type gypsum board.
1.
2.
D.
Thickness: 1/2 inch.
Long Edges: Tapered.
Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Type: With moisture- and mold-resistant core and surfaces.
1.
2.
2.2
Thickness: 5/8 inch.
Core: 5/8 inch, Type X.
EXTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD FOR CEILINGS AND SOFFITS
A.
Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board:
manufacturer's standard edges.
1.
2.
2.3
ASTM C 931/C 931M or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, with
Gold Bond Type E2XP or similar at all locations
TILE BACKING PANELS
A.
Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Board:
1.
Complying with ASTM C 1178/C 1178M.
a.
2.
Complying with ASTM C1177/C 1177M.
a.
3.
2.4
Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "DensShield Tile
Guard" by G-P Gypsum.
Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "DensArmor Plus
Interior Guard" by G-P Gypsum.
TRIM ACCESSORIES
A.
Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.
092900-2
092900
GYPSUM BOARD
1.
2.
Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper-faced
galvanized steel sheet.
Shapes:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
B.
Exterior Trim: ASTM C 1047.
1.
2.
Material: Hot-dip galvanized steel sheet, plastic, or rolled zinc.
Shapes:
a.
b.
c.
2.5
Cornerbead.
Bullnose bead.
LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound.
Expansion (control) joint.
Cornerbead.
LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
Expansion (Control) Joint: One-piece, rolled zinc with V-shaped slot and
removable strip covering slot opening.
JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A.
General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.
B.
Joint Tape:
1.
2.
3.
C.
Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper.
Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Paper.
Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10-by-10 glass mesh.
Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is
compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.
1.
2.
Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas,
use setting-type taping compound.
Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and
trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound.
a.
3.
4.
D.
Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories.
Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.
Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.
Joint Compound for Exterior Applications:
1.
2.
Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Use setting-type taping compound and setting-type,
sandable topping compound.
Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board:
As recommended by sheathing board
manufacturer.
092900-3
092900
2.6
GYPSUM BOARD
AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and
manufacturer's written recommendations.
B.
Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum
panels to continuous substrate.
1.
C.
Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
D.
Use adhesives that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from
0.033 to 0.112 inch thick.
Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing)
produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag
wool, or rock wool.
1.
Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly.
E.
Thermal Insulation: As specified in Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation."
F.
Vapor Retarder: As specified in Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation."
2.7
TEXTURE FINISHES
A.
Primer: As recommended by textured finish manufacturer.
B.
Aggregate Finish: Water-based, job-mixed, aggregated, drying-type texture finish for spray
application.
1.
Texture: Spatter knock-down.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL
A.
Comply with ASTM C 840.
B.
Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold
damaged.
C.
Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural
abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inchwide spaces at these locations, and trim
edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and
abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.
092900-4
092900
3.2
GYPSUM BOARD
APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A.
Install interior gypsum board in the following locations:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.3
Regular Type: Vertical surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
Type X: Where required for fire-resistance-rated assembly.
Ceiling Type: Ceiling surfaces.
Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Type: At wet locations.
APPLYING EXTERIOR GYPSUM PANELS FOR CEILINGS AND SOFFITS
A.
Apply panels perpendicular to supports, with end joints staggered and located over supports.
1.
2.
3.
3.4
Install with 1/4-inch open space where panels abut other construction or structural
penetrations.
Fasten with corrosion-resistant screws.
Treat joints between sheets as recommended by the manufacturer for a water tight seal
APPLYING TILE BACKING PANELS
A.
Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panel: Comply with manufacturer's written installation
instructions and install at locations indicated to receive tile. Install with 1/4-inch gap where
panels abut other construction or penetrations.
B.
Areas Not Subject to Wetting: Install regular-type gypsum wallboard panels to produce a flat
surface except at showers, tubs, and other locations indicated to receive water-resistant panels.
C.
Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in same plane, shim surfaces to produce a
uniform plane across panel surfaces.
3.5
INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES
A.
General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same
fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
B.
Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved
by Architect for visual effect.
C.
Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
Cornerbead: Use at outside corners.
LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.
L-Bead: Use where indicated.
U-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges and where indicated.
Curved-Edge Cornerbead: Use at curved openings.
Exterior Trim: Install in the following locations:
1.
2.
Cornerbead: Use at outside corners.
LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.
092900-5
092900
3.6
GYPSUM BOARD
FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD
A.
General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations,
fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces
for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.
B.
Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas.
C.
Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for
tape.
D.
Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Level 1:
Level 2:
Level 4:
Level 5:
a.
E.
3.7
Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated.
Panels that are substrate for acoustical tile.
At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view, unless otherwise indicated.
At WC-1 wall finishes
Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other Division 09 Sections.
Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panels:
Finish all joints and edges according to
PROTECTION
A.
Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight,
construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.
B.
Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
1.
2.
Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,
discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
092900-6
093000
TILING
SECTION 093000 - TILING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
1.2
Ceramic tile.
Crack isolation membrane.
Metal edge strips.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Samples:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required.
Assembled samples, with grouted joints, for each type and composition of tile and for
each color and finish required.
Stone thresholds in 6-inch lengths.
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Furnish extra materials that match and are from same production runs as products installed and
that are packaged with protective covering and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount
installed for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
TILE PRODUCTS
A.
2.2
As indicated on drawings.
SETTING MATERIALS
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
Boiardi Products; a QEP company.
Bonsal American; an Oldcastle company.
Bostik, Inc.
C-Cure.
Custom Building Products.
Jamo Inc.
Laticrete International, Inc.
MAPEI Corporation.
093000-1
093000
TILING
i.
j.
k.
B.
Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.4.
1.
following :
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
2.
3.
2.3
Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc.
Summitville Tiles, Inc.
TEC; a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company.
Boiardi Products; a QEP company.
Bonsal American; an Oldcastle company.
Bostik, Inc.
C-Cure.
Custom Building Products.
Jamo Inc.
Laticrete International, Inc.
MAPEI Corporation.
Mer-Kote Products, Inc.
Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc.
Summitville Tiles, Inc.
TEC; a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company.
Prepackaged, dry-mortar mix to which only water must be added.
Prepackaged, dry-mortar mix combined with liquid-latex additive.
GROUT MATERIALS
A.
2.4
Per Drawings.
A.
Grout Sealer: Manufacturer's standard product for sealing grout joints and that does not
change color or appearance of grout.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for
compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting
performance of installed tile.
1.
Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm, dry, clean, free of coatings that are
incompatible with tile-setting materials including curing compounds and other substances
that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness tolerances required by
ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated.
093000-2
093000
3.2
TILING
PREPARATION
A.
Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thin-set
mortar with trowelable leveling and patching compound specifically recommended by tile-setting
material manufacturer.
B.
Where indicated, prepare substrates to receive waterproofing by applying a reinforced mortar
bed that complies with ANSI A108.1A and is sloped 1/4 inch per foot toward drains.
C.
Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, use factory blended tile or blend tiles at Project site
before installing.
D.
Field-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: If indicated under tile type or needed to prevent
grout from staining or adhering to exposed tile surfaces, precoat them with continuous film of
temporary protective coating, taking care not to coat unexposed tile surfaces.
3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation" for TCA installation methods
specified in tile installation schedules.
Comply with parts of the ANSI A108 Series
"Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are referenced in TCA installation methods,
specified in tile installation schedules, and apply to types of setting and grouting materials used.
B.
Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete
covering without interruptions unless otherwise indicated.
Terminate work neatly at
obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.
C.
Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring
visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight
aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so
plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.
D.
Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern unless otherwise indicated. Lay out tile work and center
tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Lay out tile work to minimize
the use of pieces that are less than half of a tile. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise
indicated.
E.
Joint Widths: Unless otherwise indicated, install tile with the following joint widths:
1.
Quarry Tile: 1/4 inch .
F.
Metal Edge Strips: Install where exposed edge of tile flooring meets carpet, wood, or other
flooring that finishes flush with or below top of tile and no threshold is indicated.
G.
Grout Sealer: Apply grout sealer to grout joints in tile floors according to grout-sealer
manufacturer's written instructions. As soon as grout sealer has penetrated grout joints,
remove excess sealer and sealer from tile faces by wiping with soft cloth.
093000-3
095113
SECTION 095113 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
B.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency.
Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1.
2.2
Flame-Spread Index: Comply with ASTM E 1264 for Class C materials.
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS, GENERAL
A.
Glass-Fiber-Based Panels: Made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde.
B.
Acoustical Panel Standard: Comply with ASTM E 1264.
C.
Acoustical Panel High NRC: Minimum of .90
D.
Metal Suspension System Standard: Comply with ASTM C 635.
E.
Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1,
"Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements.
2.3
ACOUSTICAL PANELS
A.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
CertainTeed Corp.
Chicago Metallic Corporation.
Tectum Inc.
USG Interiors, Inc.; Subsidiary of USG Corporation.
095113-1
095113
B.
Classification: Manufacturer’s standard system
C.
Color: White where installed as a new ceiling in an isolated location. Match ex’g color & texture
where extending an existing ceiling.
D.
Food Preperation Areas: Where indicated on plans, ceiling tiles installed in food preparation
areas are to be Hard Wipe Vinyl tiles meeting local and federal standards for sanitary
environments and food preparation. Hard wipe gyp is not acceptable.
E.
Edge/Joint Detail:
F.
Thickness:
G.
Modular Size: 24 by 24 inches and 24 by 48 inches
2.4
Flush reveal sized to fit flange of exposed suspension-system members .
5/8 inch
.
.
METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM
A.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Narrow-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll
formed from cold-rolled steel sheet; prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot-dip
galvanized according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, not less than G30 coating designation; with
prefinished 9/16-inchwide metal caps on flanges. A 15/16 inch wide suspension system is
acceptable for Hard Wipe Vinyl Ceilings per drawings.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
CertainTeed Corp.
Chicago Metallic Corporation.
USG Interiors, Inc.; Subsidiary of USG Corporation.
Structural Classification: Heavy-duty system.
End Condition of Cross Runners: Override (stepped) or butt-edge type.
Face Design: Flat, flush.
Cap Material: Steel or aluminum cold-rolled sheet.
Cap Finish: Painted white
.
Roll-Formed, Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not
indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that comply with
seismic design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as
that used for exposed flanges of suspension-system runners.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636/C 636M and seismic design
requirements indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling
Systems Handbook."
095113-2
095113
B.
Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at
opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders, and comply
with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.
1.
Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels as indicated on reflected ceiling plans.
095113-3
099600
SECTION 09960 - HIGH PERFORMANCE COATINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A. Work under this section consists of surface preparation, priming, painting, and finishing work
necessary to complete Work indicated or reasonably implied on Drawings.
B. Use high performance coating systems specified in this section to coat new hollow metal doors
and frames, handrails and misc. metals associated with interior/exterior elements.
1.2
RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. Exterior Painting – Section 099113.
B. Interior Painting – Section 099123.
C. Metals – Division 5.
1.3
REFERENCES
A. Publications listed herein are part of this specification to extent referenced
B. American Society for Testing and Materials:
1. ASTM B117 Test Method for Salt Spray (fog) Testing
2. ASTM D16 Terminology Relating to Paint, Varnish, Lacquer, and Related Products
3. ASTM D149 Test Method for Dielectric Breakdown Voltage and Dielectric Strength of Solid
Electrical Insulating Materials at Commercial Power Frequencies
4. ASTM D522 Test Methods for Mandrel Bend Test of Attached Organic Coatings
5. ASTM D870 Practice for Testing Water Resistance of Coatings Using Water Immersion
6. ASTM D1014 Practice for Conducting Exterior Exposure Tests of Paints on Steel
7. ASTM D1653 Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Organic Coating Films
8. ASTM D2794 Test Method for Resistance of Organic Coatings to the Effects of Rapid
Deformation (Impact)
9. ASTM D3273 Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of Interior
Coatings in an Environmental Chamber
10. ASTM D3359 Test Method for Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test
11. ASTM D3363 Test for Film Hardness by Pencil Test
12. ASTM D4060 Test Method for Abrasion of Organic Coatings by the Taber Abraser
13. ASTM D4141 Practice for Conducting Accelerated Outdoor Exposure Tests of Coatings
14. ASTM D4263 Test Method for Indicating Moisture in Concrete by the Plastic Sheet Method.
15. ASTM D4541 Test Method for Pull-Out Strength of Coatings Using Portable AdhesionTesters
16. ASTM D4585 Practice for Testing the Water Resistance of Coatings Using Controlled
Condensation
17. ASTM E84 Test Methods for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
18. ASTM G8 Test Methods for Cathodic Disbonding of Pipeline Coatings
19. ASTM G53 Practice for Operating Light-and-Water-Exposure Apparatus (Fluorescent UVCondensation Type) for Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials
C. National Fire Protection Association:
1. NFPA 101 Life Safety Code
D. Steel Structures Painting Council:
1. SSPC SP-1 Specification for Solvent Cleaning
2. SSPC SP-2 Specification for Hand Tool Cleaning
3. SSPC SP-3 Specification for Power Tool Cleaning
4. SSPC SP-5 Specification for White Metal Blast Cleaning
5. SSPC SP-6 Specification for Commercial Blast Cleaning
6. SSPC SP-7 Specification for Brush-Off Blast Cleaning
7. SSPC SP-10 Specification for Near White Metal Blast Cleaning
8. SSPC SP-11 Specification for Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal
9. SSPC PA-1 Painting Application Specification
1.4
DEFINITIONS
A. Terms PAINT or PAINTING shall in a general sense have reference to, urethane zinc-rich & epoxy
primers, polyurethane and fluoropolymer finish type coatings and application of these materials.
B. DRY FILM THICKNESS (DFT): Thickness, measured in mils, of a coat of paint in cured state
C. Conform to ASTM D16 for interpretation of terms used in this section.
1.5
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Submit in accordance with Section 01300.
099600-1
099600
Submit manufacturer's literature describing products to be provided, giving manufacturer's
name, product name, and product line number for each material.
3. Include technical data sheets for each coating, giving descriptive data, curing times, mixing,
thinning, and application requirements.
a.
Provide material analysis, including vehicle type and percentage by weight and by
volume of vehicle, resin and pigment.
b.
Submit manufacturer's Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) and other safety
requirements.
B. Shop Drawings:
2. Submit a complete list of products proposed for use, including identifying product names and
catalog numbers.
a.
Arrange in same format as Schedule of Coating Systems in Part 3 of this Section.
b.
Include applicable manufacturer's data and recommendations.
C. Samples:
2. Selection Samples: Submit color charts displaying manufacturer's full range of standard
colors for initial selection by Engineer.
3. Verification Samples:
a.
Submit 3 samples of each coating and color selected, showing bare, prepared surface
and each successive coat.
b.
Submit samples on metal, label samples on back, identifying manufacturer, product
name, and color number.
c.
Sample Size: Not less than 4" x 4" (100 mm x 100 mm)
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications:
1. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacture of high performance coatings with a
minimum of 10 years experience.
2. Applicator: Trained in application techniques and procedures of coating materials and
capable of demonstrating a minimum of 2 years successful experience in such application.
B. Single Source Responsibility:
1. Provide products of a single manufacturer or items standard with manufacturer of specified
coating materials.
2. Provide secondary materials which are produced or are specifically recommended by coating
system manufacturer to ensure compatibility of system.
C. Regulatory Requirements: Conform to applicable codes and ordinances for flame, fuel, smoke,
and volatile organic compound (VOC) ratings requirements for finishes at time of application.
D. Pre-Installation Meeting:
1. Schedule a pre-installation meeting to be attended by Contractor, Owner's representative,
coating applicators, and a representative of coating material manufacturer to be held on-site
before field application of coating systems begins.
2. Topics to be discussed at meeting shall include:
a.
Review of Contract Documents and accepted shop drawings with resolution of
deviations or differences.
b.
Review items such as environmental conditions, surface conditions, surface
preparation, application procedures, and protection following application.
c.
Establish on-site storage and working areas.
d.
Identify application requirements and required preparation work.
3. Prepare a written report of pre-installation conference and submit to parties in attendance
within 3 days following conference.
MOCK-UP
A. Before proceeding, prepare and finish sample area in location directed by Architect.
B. When approved, use finishes as standard for application, appearance and materials for similar
areas or items throughout project.
A. Delivery:
1. Deliver products in manufacturer's original unopened containers, each having manufacturer's
label, intact and legible.
2. Include on label for each container:
a.
Manufacturer's name
2.
1.6
1.7
1.8
099600-2
099600
b.
Type of paint
c.
Manufacturer's stock number
d.
Color name and number
e.
Instructions for thinning, where applicable
B. Storage and Protection:
1. Store materials in a protected area, away from construction activities and restricted to paint
materials and related equipment.
2. Maintain temperature in area of storage between 40 degrees F (4 degrees C) and 110
degrees F (43 degrees C).
3. Comply with health and fire safety regulations.
4. Remove damaged materials from Site.
1.9
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Requirements for Application of Coating Materials:
1. Air temperature: Not below 40 degrees F (2 degrees C) or above 110 degrees F (43 degrees
C).
2. Minimum Surface Temperature:
a.
Refer to specific product information sheets for minimum surface temperature
requirements.
b.
Minimum 5 degrees F (15 degrees C) above dew point and in a rising mode.
c.
Relative humidity: no higher than 85%.
d.
Wind Velocity: For exterior spray application, less than 15 mph (25 kph).
e.
Atmosphere: Relatively free of airborne dust.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Sherwin-Williams (Basis-of-Design)
B. Approved comparable substitution.
2.2
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Laboratory Services:
1. Documents: Review Contract Documents and applicable sections of referenced standards.
2. Shop Painting Inspection:
a.
Verify cleaning operations to surfaces are to condition specified.
b.
Verify conformance of paint to specification.
c.
Check for thickness of each coating, final thickness and holidays.
d.
Check touchup for final finish.
3. Reports:
a.
Submit written progress reports describing tests and inspections made and showing
action taken to correct nonconforming work.
b.
Report uncorrected deviations from Contract Documents
2.3
INTERIOR PRODUCTS
A. Light/Moderate Industrial Exposures: Interior Dry Ferrous Metals
1. Latex Systems (Zero VOC Topcoat)
a.
1st Coat: S-W Pro Industrial® Pro-Cryl® Primer, B66-310 Series (2-4 mils dry)
b.
2nd Coat: S-W Pro Industrial® Zero VOC Satin Acrylic B66-660 Series
c.
3rd Coat: S-W Pro Industrial® Zero VOC Satin Acrylic B66-660 Series (2.5 - 4.0 mils
dry per coat)
B. Epoxy Systems (Water Base)
1. Locations: Toilet Rooms, Janitor Room
2. Eg-Shel Finish (Zero VOC Topcoat)
a.
1st Coat: S-W ProMar 200 Latex Primer, B28W8200 (4 mils wet, 1.2 mils dry)
b.
2nd Coat: S-W Pro Industrial Zero VOC Waterborne Catalyzed Epoxy, B73-360 Series
c.
3rd Coat: S-W Pro Industrial Zero VOC Waterborne Catalyzed Epoxy, B73-360 Series
(2.0- 4 mils dry per coat)
2.4
EXTERIOR PRODUCTS
A. Non-Ferrous- (Galvanized & Aluminum), Light/Moderate
1. Primer: B66W00001 - DTM Acrylic Primer Finish applied per data page specifications
2. Finish: B66W00211 - DTM Acrylic Coating Semi-Gloss applied per data page specifications
B. Non-Ferrous- (Galvanized & Aluminum), Light/Moderate, Urethane
1. Primer: B66W00310 - Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl® Universal Primer applied per data page
specifications
099600-3
099600
Finish: B66W00351 - Sher-Cryl HPA High Performance Acrylic Semi-Gloss applied per data
page specifications
C. METAL (Structural Steel, etc.), Light/Moderate
specifications
2. Finish: B66W00211 - DTM Acrylic Coating Semi-Gloss applied per data page specifications
D. METAL (Structural Steel, etc.), Light/Moderate, Urethane
specifications
2. Finish: B66W00351 - Sher-Cryl HPA High Performance Acrylic Semi-Gloss applied per data
page specifications
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
ACCEPTABLE INSTALLERS
A. Applicator must be acceptable to coatings manufacturer.
B. Submit certification letter listing 5 jobs similar in material and extent to those systems indicated for
the project
3.2
EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions under which application of coating systems is to performed for
conditions that will adversely affect execution, permanence, or quality of coating system
application.
B. Report conditions detrimental to timely and proper execution of Work to Architect.
C. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
D. Commencement of installation constitutes acceptance of conditions and responsibility for
satisfactory performance.
3.3
PROTECTION
A. Provide drop cloths, shields, and other protective equipment.
B. Protect elements surrounding work of this section from damage or disfiguration.
C. As Work proceeds, promptly remove spilled, splashed, or splattered materials from surfaces.
D. Post Wet Paint signs during application of coating materials and until surfaces are adequately
cured.
E. Post No Smoking signs during application of solvent-based materials.
F. Take precautionary measures to prevent fire hazards and spontaneous combustion.
G. Remove empty containers from site.
H. Place cotton waste, cloths and hazardous materials in containers, and remove from site daily.
I.
Protect work against damage until fully cured
3.4
SURFACE PREPARATION AND TOUCH-UP
A. General Requirements:
1. Prior to application of primer, prepare surfaces to receive specified coating system in
compliance with manufacturer's recommendations and specifications of SSPC, ICRI and ACI
as specified in this Section.
2. Clean all surfaces of residual deposits of grease, scale, rust, oil, dirt, and other foreign
matter, immediately prior to priming by power-washing with hot-water and 1500 PSI.
3. Provide dry and smooth surfaces, free from dust and foreign matter which will adversely
affect adhesion or appearance.
B. Steel:
1. Clean surfaces free of residual deposits of grease, rust, loose paint, loose concrete, dirt, dust
and oil.
2. Surface Preparation:
a.
(Field) Prepare in accordance with SSPC-SP6 Commercial Blast Cleaning standards.
Notify Engineer of defective metals – including deep pits, severely corroded bolts, nuts
and welds for further inspection.
3.5
A. Testing Laboratory Services:
1. Documents: Review Contract Documents and applicable sections of referenced standards.
2. Field Painting Inspection:
a.
Verify cleaning operations to surfaces are to condition specified.
b.
Verify conformance of paint to specification.
c.
Check for thickness of each coating, final thickness and holidays.
d.
Check touchup for final finish.
3. Reports:
2.
099600-4
099600
Submit written progress reports describing tests and inspections made and showing
action taken to correct nonconforming work.
b.
Report uncorrected deviations from Contract Documents.
B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Coatings manufacturer to provide on-site inspections, technical
assistance, and guidance for application of coating system.
CLEANING
A. At completion of day's work, remove from site rubbish and accumulated materials.
B. Clean paint spots and other soiling from pre-finished surfaces and surfaces with integral finish
using solvents which will not damage finished surface.
C. Leave storage area clean and in same condition indicated for equivalent spaces in Project.
WASTE MANAGEMENT
A. General Requirements:
1. Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic waste in designated containers.
2. Return solvent and oil soaked rags for contaminant recovery and laundering or for proper
disposal; pouring on ground not permitted.
3. Place paints or solvents in designated containers for proper disposal.
4. Where paint recycling is available, collect waste paint by type and provide for delivery to
recycling or collection facility.
B. Containment/Disposal Requirements:
1. Surface Preparation Debris Containment:
a.
When required by federal, state or local regulation, entire tank and structure shall be
enclosed and surface preparation debris contained.
b.
Refer to SSPC 61 Guide for Containing Debris Generated During Paint Removal
Operations.
2. Disposal of Surface Preparation Debris:
a.
Refer to SSPC 71 Guide for the Disposal of Lead-Contaminated Surface Preparation
Debris.
b.
Surface preparation debris shall be disposed of in compliance with applicable federal,
state and local regulations.
3. Containment/Disposal Costs: Contractor shall be responsible for costs associated with
containment and waste disposal that may result from execution of this Project.
SCHEDULE OF COATING SYSTEMS
A. Exterior Ferrous Metals: Hollow Metal Doors and Frames, Handrails, Misc. Metals
1. Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP1, followed by SSPC-SP2-3 Hand or Power Tool Cleaning to
remove loose rust, loose coatings and achieve a clean and dry substrate prior to coating.
2. Primer: Dry Film Thickness: 4.0 to 5.0 mils
a.
Basis of Design: Tnemec Series 135-Color Chembuild
3. Finish: Dry Film Thickness: 3.0 to 5.0 mils
a. Basis of Design: Tnemec Series 1075U-Color EnduraShield II
a.
3.6
3.7
3.8
B.
Interior Steel: Hollow-Metal Doors and Frames
1. Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP1, followed by SSPC-SP2-3 Hand or Power Tool Cleaning to
remove loose rust, loose coatings and achieve a clean and dry substrate prior to coating.
2. Primer: 2.0-3.0 mils.
a.
Basis of Design: Tnemec Series 115-Color Uni-Bond
3. Finish Coat: 2.0-3.0 mils.
a.
Basis of Design: Tnemec Series 1028-Color Enduratone
4. Total Dry Film Thickness: 4.0 to 6.0 mils.
END OF SECTION
099600-5
102113
TOILET COMPARTMENTS
SECTION 102113 - TOILET COMPARTMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
1.2
Solid-polymer toilet compartments configured as toilet enclosures and urinal screens.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Shop Drawings: For toilet compartments.
attachments to other work.
Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SOLID-POLYMER UNITS
1.
Bradley Bradmar 100% recycled HDPE Partition
B.
Toilet-Enclosure Style: Overhead braced.
C.
Urinal-Screen Style: Overhead braced.
D.
Door, Panel, Screen, and Pilaster Construction: Solid, high-density polyethylene (HDPE) panel
material, not less than 1 inch thick, seamless, with eased edges, and with homogenous color
and pattern throughout thickness of material.
1.
2.
Integral Hinges: Configure doors and pilasters to receive integral hinges.
Polymer Panel Finish: One color and pattern in each room.
a.
E.
Color and Pattern: Toffee (M247R).
Pilaster Shoes and Sleeves (Caps): Manufacturer's standard design; polymer or stainless steel.
1.
Polymer Color and Pattern: Matching pilaster.
F.
Urinal-Screen Post: Manufacturer's standard post design of material matching the thickness
and construction of pilasters or 1-3/4-inch- square, aluminum tube with satin finish Insert
requirement; with shoe and sleeve (cap) matching that on the pilaster.
G.
Brackets (Fittings):
1.
Full-Height (Continuous) Type: Manufacturer's standard design; extruded aluminum or
stainless steel.
102113-1
102113
2.2
TOILET COMPARTMENTS
ACCESSORIES
A.
Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard design, heavy-duty operating hardware
and accessories.
B.
Overhead Bracing: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded-aluminum head rail with
antigrip profile and in manufacturer's standard finish.
C.
Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel or
chrome-plated steel or brass, finished to match the items they are securing, with theft-resistanttype heads. Provide sex-type bolts for through-bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use
stainless steel, hot-dip galvanized steel, or other rust-resistant, protective-coated steel.
2.3
FABRICATION
A.
Overhead-Braced Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant supports, leveling
mechanism, and anchors at pilasters to suit floor conditions. Provide shoes at pilasters to
conceal supports and leveling mechanism.
B.
Door Size and Swings: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24-inchwide, in-swinging doors for
standard toilet compartments and 36-inchwide, out-swinging doors with a minimum 32-inchwide, clear opening for compartments designated as accessible.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid, straight,
level, and plumb. Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring
devices.
B.
Clearances: Maximum 1/2 inch between pilasters and panels; 1 inch between panels and walls.
3.2
ADJUSTING
A.
Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to hardware manufacturer's
written instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in-swinging doors to hold doors open
approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out-swinging
doors to return doors to fully closed position.
102113-2
107000
EXTERIOR SUN CONTROL DEVICES
SECTION 10700 – EXTERIOR SUN CONTROL DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. Provide fixed Sunshades as shown, specified, or both shown and specified.
B. The drawings show the extent of the work, the dimensioned profile and depth of the screen to be
provided.
C. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Metal Fabrication - 055000
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit specifications, data, and installation, instructions from the manufacturer of
the Sunshades.
B. Submit shop drawings for the system.
component parts.
Show anchorage, details and connections for all the
C. Samples: Submit one sample minimum 24" long of each material to be utilized at each Sunshade
with appropriate finish.
D. Warranty: Provide written warranty to the owner that all screen products will be free of defective
materials or workmanship for a period of one year from date of installation.
E. Quality Assurance:
1. Single subcontract responsibility: Subcontract the work to a single firm that has had not less
than three years in the successful fabrication and installation of work similar to that shown
and required.
2. Performance requirements: Design sunshades to accommodate local requirements for snow
and wind loading.
3. Manufacturer to provided *SIGNED & SEALED ENGINEERING CALCULATIONS BY AN
ENGINEER REGISTERED IN THE PROJECT STATE* for all sunshade systems and
mounting attachments.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 PRODUCTS
Sunshades shall be Model 200-4 as manufactured by;
Construction Specialties, Inc. located at
49 Meeker Avenue, Cranford, New Jersey 07016.
Tel.1- 800-631-7379
107000-1
107000
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B211, Alloy 6063-T5.
B. Fasteners: Fasteners shall be aluminum or stainless steel. Provide types, gauges and lengths to
suit unit installation conditions.
C. Anchors and Inserts: Use non-Ferrous metal or hot dip galvanized anchors and inserts for
installation and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use stainless steel or lead
expansion bolt devices for drill-in place anchors. Furnish inserts, as required, yo be set into
concrete or masonry work.
2.03 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A.
Provide fixed Sunshades and accessories of design, material, sizes, depth, arrangement, and
thickness as indicated or as required for optimal performance with respect to strength; durability;
and uniform appearance.
B. Include supports, anchorage, and accessories required for complete assembly
2.04 SUNSHADE CONSTRUCTION
A. Components: Blades to be fabricated from one-piece 6063-T5 alloy extrusions and to be 10"
deep airfoil type blade, minimum 0.081" thick.
B. Outriggers to be aluminum flat plate, 0.125” thick.
C. Blades to be mechanically fastened to the flat plate outriggers in the shop and shipped fully
preassembled to the jobsite.
D. All mounting brackets and associated hardware are to be provided by sunshade manufacturer.
2.05 ALUMINUM FINISH
A.
Anodized Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and
finish indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209.
Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221.
Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429.
Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Examine openings to receive the work. Do not proceed until any unsatisfactory conditions have
been corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation of the work.
B. Verify dimensions of supporting structure at the site by accurate field measurements so that the
work will be accurately designed, fabricated and fitted to the structure.
107000-2
107000
C. Anchor Sunscreen to building substructure as indicated on architectural drawings.
D. Erection Tolerances:
1. Variation from level: +/- 1/8" maximum in any column to column space or 20'-0"
non-cumulative.
2. Offsets in end-to-end or edge-to-edge alignment of consecutive members 1/32".
runs,
E. Corners: Miter sun control fascia assembly at outside corner as shown on drawings.
F. Cut and trim component parts during erection only with the approval of the manufacturer or
fabricator, and in accordance with his recommendations. Restore finish completely. Remove and
replace members where cutting and trimming has impaired the strength or appearance of the
assembly as directed.
G. Do not erect warped, bowed, deformed or otherwise damaged or defaced members. Remove and
replace any members damaged in the erection process as directed.
H. Set units level, plumb and true to line, with uniform joints.
107000-3

Specialty Retailer - James E. John Construction Co., Inc.

Transcription

Similar documents

standard food and beverage concession agreement

Atlantis Energy Systems Inc.

ru-200 roofing underlayment - WaterBlock® Building Systems

cobra 142gtl om parts list

Owner`s Manual

The Denver Post

Wind Turbine Lubricant Tests - Southwest Research Institute

project manual - Hall Construction

Built-in Rain Screen Drainage Matrix Cost and Labor

Thursday, September 29, 2016 3 to 5 pm, Grizzly Rose Dance Hall A